Rohde & Schwarz SMBV100B User Manual Download Page 772

Page: 772 / 1030

Remote Control Commands

R&S

SMBV100B

770

User Manual 1178.4460.02 ─ 03

Manual operation:

See

"Carrier State"

on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STARt

<Start>

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STOP

<Stop>

Selects the last carrier in the carrier range to which the settings shall apply.

Parameters:

<Stop>

integer
Range:

0 to 511

*RST:

Example:

BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:STOP 4

The carrier range stops at carrier 4.

Manual operation:

See

"Carrier Start/Start"

on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:POWer:STEP

<Step>

Sets the step width by which the starting power of the carriers in the defined carrier
range is incremented.

Parameters:

<Step>

float
Range:

-80 to 80

Increment: 0.01
*RST:

Default unit: dB

Example:

BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:POW -80dB

Sets a power of -80 dB for the carriers in the carrier range.

BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:POW:STEP 1 dB

The power is incremented by 1dB for each carrier.
That is, the first carrier has -80 dB, the second -79 dB, and so
on.

Manual operation:

See

"Gain Step"

on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:POWer[:STARt]

<Start>

Sets the power for the individual carriers in the defined carrier range.

Parameters:

<Start>

float
Range:

-80 to 0

Increment: 0.01
*RST:

Default unit: dB

Example:

BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:POW -50 dB

sets the power of the carriers in the carrier range to -50 dB.

SOURce Subsystem

Summary of Contents for SMBV100B

Page 1: ...R S SMBV100B Vector Signal Generator User Manual User Manual Version 03 1178446002 Ü Ê2 ...

Page 2: ...es firmware version FW 4 50 074 xx and later of the R S SMBV100B 2018 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Mühldorfstr 15 81671 München Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R S is a registered trademark of Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners 117...

Page 3: ...sic Safety Instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Riesgo de lesiones y daños en el instrumento El instrumento se debe usar de manera adecuada para prevenir descargas eléctricas incendios lesiones o daños materiales No abrir la carcasa del instrumento Lea y cumpla las Instrucciones de seguridad elementales suministradas con el instrumento...

Page 4: ...die Produktdokumentation gut auf und geben Sie diese an weitere Benutzer des Produkts weiter Risque de blessures et d endommagement de l appareil L appareil doit être utilisé conformément aux prescriptions afin d éviter les électrocutions incendies dommages corporels et matériels N ouvrez pas le boîtier de l appareil Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fondamentales fournies avec l appare...

Page 5: ...White Papers etc 27 2 Getting Started 28 2 1 Preparing for Use 28 2 1 1 Putting into Operation 28 2 1 1 1 EMI Suppression 29 2 1 1 2 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument 29 2 1 1 3 Accessory List 30 2 1 1 4 Placing or Mounting the Instrument 30 2 1 1 5 Connecting AC Power 32 2 1 1 6 Turning the Instrument On and Off 32 2 1 1 7 Functional Check 34 2 1 1 8 Default Settings 34 2 1 1 9 Checking the S...

Page 6: ...2 3 4 Enabling and Configuring a Marker Signal 60 2 3 5 Verifying the Generated Signal with the Graphics Display 61 2 3 6 Saving and Recalling Settings 64 2 3 7 Generating an EUTRA LTE Signal 67 2 4 System Overview 70 2 4 1 Brief Introduction to the Instrument s Concept 70 2 4 2 Signal Flow at a Glance 70 2 4 3 Internal Baseband Source Baseband Block 71 2 4 4 Digital Baseband Input BB Input Block ...

Page 7: ...4 3 Configuring the Internal Baseband Source 85 3 1 Overview of the Signal Generation Modes 85 3 2 How to Access the Functions in the Baseband Domain 86 3 3 Generating Signals According to Digital Standards 87 3 4 Common Functions and Settings in the Baseband Domain 89 3 4 1 Basics on Signals Modulation Types and Filters Used the Baseband Domain 89 3 4 1 1 Data Clock and Control Signals and Source...

Page 8: ... 3 5 3 Custom Digital Modulation Settings 116 3 5 3 1 General Settings 117 3 5 3 2 Trigger Marker and Clock Setting 119 3 5 3 3 Data Source 119 3 5 3 4 Modulation Settings 121 3 5 3 5 Filter Settings 124 3 5 3 6 Power Ramp Control Settings 126 3 5 3 7 Data List Editor 128 3 5 3 8 Control and Marker Lists Editor 130 3 5 4 How to Create Data and Control Lists 134 3 5 4 1 How to Create and Assign a C...

Page 9: ...Create a Waveform File with the R S WinIQSIM2 and Load it in the ARB 162 3 6 4 5 How to Manually Create a Waveform Using Tag File Format 167 3 6 4 6 How to Define Periodically Repeating Traces 172 3 6 4 7 How to Create a Control List Using Tag File Format 173 3 6 4 8 How to Create a Data List Using Tag File Format 175 3 6 4 9 Editing Waveform Files Data and Control Lists 176 3 6 5 Tags for Wavefor...

Page 10: ...de Next Segment 221 3 7 5 3 Triggering in Next Trigger Mode Next Segment Seamless 222 3 7 5 4 Triggering in Next Trigger Mode Sequencer 223 3 8 Generating Multi Carrier Signals 223 3 8 1 Required Options 224 3 8 2 About the Multi Carrier Waveforms 224 3 8 2 1 Defining the Carrier Frequency 225 3 8 2 2 Optimizing the Crest Factor 225 3 8 3 Multi Carrier Settings 226 3 8 3 1 General Settings 226 3 8...

Page 11: ...rator 255 4 1 3 AWGN Settings 259 4 1 3 1 General Settings 260 4 1 3 2 Noise Power Output Results Settings 262 4 1 4 How to Configure the Noise Generator for Receiver Tests 267 4 2 Impairing the Signal 269 4 2 1 Required Options 269 4 2 2 About the Linear I Q Impairments 269 4 2 2 1 Gain and Gain Imbalance 269 4 2 2 2 I and Q Offset 270 4 2 2 3 Quadrature Offset 271 4 2 3 Analog and Digital Impair...

Page 12: ...llator Coupling 305 6 9 1 Required Options 306 6 9 2 Phase Coherence 306 6 9 3 LO Coupling Settings 307 6 9 4 How to Configure Cascaded Instruments 308 6 10 Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode 310 6 10 1 Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes 312 6 10 2 About Sweep Mode 320 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode 320 6 10 2 2 Sweep Signal Shapes 322 6 10 3 About...

Page 13: ...ernal Trigger Settings 363 6 11 4 6 FM PhiM and AM Modulation Sources 364 Source LF Generator Settings 365 Source External Settings 368 Source Noise Generator Settings 369 6 11 4 7 LF Signal Output Settings 370 6 11 4 8 Overview 372 6 11 5 How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal 373 6 11 6 How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal 374 6 12 Improving Level Performance 375 6 12 1 Attenuator 375...

Page 14: ...y 411 Power Spectrum 412 7 1 2 2 Signal Acquisition Points 412 7 1 2 3 Display Functions 413 7 1 3 Graphics Configuration Settings 414 7 1 4 Graphical Signal Display Settings 418 7 1 5 How to Verify the Generated Signal with the Graphics Display 420 8 Multi Instrument Setups 427 8 1 Synchronizing Instruments 427 8 2 Generating Phase Coherent Signals 427 8 3 Generating Time Aligned Baseband Signals...

Page 15: ...on Status Overview Settings 445 8 5 2 2 External Instrument Configuration Settings 449 Remote Config Settings 450 Remote Control Settings 453 Show Connector 454 8 5 3 Overview 455 8 6 Digital Baseband Input Settings 455 8 6 1 General Settings 457 8 6 2 Signal Input Settings 459 8 6 3 Sample Rate Settings 462 8 6 4 Input Level Settings 463 8 7 I Q Analog Output Settings 464 8 7 1 General Analog I Q...

Page 16: ... File System Protection 498 9 9 2 Accessing the File System of the R S SMBV100B Via ftp 499 9 9 3 Accessing the R S SMBV100B File System Via SMB Samba 500 9 9 4 Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer 502 9 9 5 Using a File Server for Test Files Exchange 502 9 10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings 503 9 10 1 Hardcopy Settings 503 9 10 2 How to Save a Hardcopy of the Display 507 10 Gener...

Page 17: ...efine User Key Actions Settings 528 10 3 3 Assigning Actions to the User Key 529 10 4 Managing Licenses and License Keys 530 10 4 1 Manage License Keys Settings 531 10 4 2 How to Move a Portable License 534 10 5 Using the Security Settings 535 10 5 1 Protection Level Settings 537 10 5 2 Setting Security Parameters 538 10 5 2 1 Update Policy Security Settings 538 10 5 2 2 Disk Memory Security Setti...

Page 18: ... 4 4 RS232 Settings 566 11 4 5 Instrument Emulations Settings 567 11 4 6 Active Connections Settings 568 11 4 7 QR Code 569 11 5 LXI Settings 570 11 5 1 LXI Status Settings 571 11 5 2 LXI Browser Settings 572 11 5 2 1 LAN Configuration 573 IP Configuration 573 Advanced Config 574 Ping Client 575 SCPI Remote Trace 575 Data Sheet 576 11 6 How to Find the VISA Resource String 577 11 7 How to Change t...

Page 19: ...he Online Help 594 11 14 How to Record Create SCPI Lists 595 11 15 How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists 598 11 16 How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC 599 11 16 1 Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Desktop System 599 11 16 1 1 Using a Web Browser 599 11 16 1 2 Using a VNC Client Software 600 11 16 2 Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device 602 11 16 2 1 Using a VNC App 603 11 16 2 2 Usi...

Page 20: ...D INITiate and SLISt Subsystems 649 12 15 SCONfiguration Subsystem 662 12 15 1 Multi Instrument Configuration 664 12 15 2 I Q Stream Mapping 665 12 15 3 External RF and I Q Instruments 665 12 16 SOURce Subsystem 676 12 16 1 Connector Settings 677 12 16 2 SOURce BBIN Subsystem 681 12 16 3 Analog Modulation Subsystems 688 12 16 3 1 SOURce MODulation Subsystem 689 12 16 3 2 SOURce AM Subsystem 689 12...

Page 21: ...uencing Commands 758 Multi Carrier Commands 761 Trigger Commands 773 Marker Commands 776 Clock Commands 778 12 16 4 4 SOURce BB MCCW Subsystem 779 Programming Examples 779 General Settings and Carrier Setup Settings 783 Trigger Settings 790 Marker Settings 793 Clock Settings 795 12 16 4 5 SOURce AWGN Subsystem 795 12 16 4 6 SOURce BB IMPairment Subsystem 802 12 16 4 7 SOURce BB GRAPhics Subsystem ...

Page 22: ...change 860 12 16 12 SOURce NOISe Subsystem 863 12 16 13 SOURce PGEN Subsystem 864 12 16 14 SOURce PHASe Subsystem 866 12 16 15 SOURce POWer Subsystem 867 12 16 16 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem 876 12 16 17 SOURce SWEep Subsystem 881 12 17 SYSTem Subsystem 889 12 18 STATus Subsystem 913 12 19 TEST Subsystem 917 12 20 TRIGger Subsystem 922 12 21 UNIT Subsystem 924 13 Maintenance 926 13 1 Cleaning 926...

Page 23: ...essages 945 14 1 2 Permanent Messages 945 14 2 SCPI Error Messages 946 14 3 Device Specific Error Messages 946 14 4 Querying Error Messages 948 14 5 Resolving Network Connection Failures 950 14 6 Collecting Information for Technical Support 951 Annex 953 A Reference Information for Remote Control 953 A 1 Additional Basics on Remote Control 953 A 1 1 Messages 953 A 1 2 LAN Interface Messages 954 A ...

Page 24: ... 5 3 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 969 A 1 5 4 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 970 A 1 5 5 Questionable Status Register STATus QUEStionable 971 A 1 5 6 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation 971 A 1 5 7 Application of the Status Reporting System 971 Service Request 972 Serial Poll 972 Query of an instrument status 972 Error Queue 973 A 1...

Page 25: ...B CVI etc For a detailed specification refer to the data sheet 1 2 For Your Safety The R S SMBV100B is designated for the development production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial and laboratory environments Use the R S SMBV100B only for its designated purpose Observe the operating conditions and performance limits stated in the data sheet The product documentation...

Page 26: ...gs and task descriptions Applying I Q Vector Modulation Descriptions of the configuration settings Configuring the RF Signal Descriptions of the individual operation modes including configuration settings and task descriptions Monitoring Signal Characteristics The concept of real time graphic display and the baseband power level surveil lance function File and Data Management Description of genera...

Page 27: ...creenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 1 4 Documentation Overview This section provides an overview of the R S SMBV100B user documentation Unless specified otherwise you find the documents on the R S SMBV100B product page at www rohde schwarz com...

Page 28: ... 4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R S SMBV100B in secure areas It is available for download on the Internet 1 4 5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions operating conditions and further important information The printed document is delivered with the instrument 1 4 6 Data Sheets and Brochures The data sheet contains the technical spe...

Page 29: ...178 4460 02 03 1 4 8 Application Notes Application Cards White Papers etc These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu lar topics See www rohde schwarz com application smbv100b Documentation Overview ...

Page 30: ...s in the following sections In particular Do not open the instrument casing Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions Specific operating conditions are required to ensure accurate measurements and to avoid damage to the instrument Observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the basic safety instructions and the instrument s data sheet Instrumen...

Page 31: ...suitable shielded cables of high quality For example use double shielded RF BNC and LAN cables CAT6 STP Note USB cables are of varying and often poor quality Therefore check the qual ity of each individual USB cable as described in the service manual Always terminate open cable ends For connection to the HS Dig I Q interfaces of the instrument use QSFP passive copper cable with max length of 3 m A...

Page 32: ... aware of the weight of the instrument when lifting it Observe the information on transporting heavy instruments in the basic safety instructions provided with the instru ment 2 1 1 3 Accessory List The instrument comes with the following accessories Power cable Getting Started printed manual 2 1 1 4 Placing or Mounting the Instrument The R S SMBV100B is designed for use under laboratory condition...

Page 33: ...500 N Risk of injury when stacking instruments A stack of instruments can tilt over and cause injury if not stacked correctly Further more the instruments at the bottom of the stack can be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments Never stack more than three instruments If you need to stack more than three instruments ins...

Page 34: ... Refer to the data sheet for the requirements of voltage and frequency There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses The AC supply and power switch is at the rear of the unit To connect the AC supply Connect the R S SMBV100B to the AC power source using the supplied power cable Note Since the instrument is designed in compliance with standard EN 61010 1 safety class I it must only b...

Page 35: ... and ready state briefly press the On Standby key If a previous session was terminated regularly the instrument uses the last setup with the relevant instrument settings To set up a new configuration press the Preset key to return the instrument to its defined reset preset state To customize the start settings e g to recall previously saved settings Use the Save Rcl function or Define the User key...

Page 36: ...tected test procedures which can be accessed if protection level 2 is dis abled The corresponding procedure is described in the Service Manual 2 1 1 8 Default Settings When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but the state that was set before the instrument was switched off Use the Preset function to return the instrument to its defined preset state every time a...

Page 37: ...can be equipped with both hardware and firmware options To check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note proceed as follows 1 Press the Setup key 2 Select Instrument Assembly Hardware Config and Software Options A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed 3 Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note...

Page 38: ...5 2 1 3 Connecting USB Devices The USB interfaces of the R S SMBV100B allow you to connect USB devices includ ing USB hubs directly to the instrument Due to the large number of available USB devices there is almost no limit to the expansions that are possible with the R S SMBV100B The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful Memory stick for easy transfer of data to from a compu...

Page 39: ... browser supporting Java To transfer data from a remote computer and back for example using network fold ers To use power sensors with netwok capability e g the R S NRP LAN power sen sors This section describes how to configure the LAN interface Accessing operating system No access to the operating system is required for normal operation All necessary system settings can be made in the Setup dialo...

Page 40: ...es and cable connectors of poor quality or failures in the autonegotiation process can cause network connection failures If the network connection to the instrument fails check the network infrastructure and contact your network administrator For details see section Troubleshooting and Error Messages 2 1 4 2 Using Computer Names Hostnames In a LAN that uses a DNS server each PC or instrument conne...

Page 41: ...ameter Hostname in the Network tab is now enabled for configuration 6 Change the Hostname 2 1 4 3 Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways If the network supports DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol the address information is assigned automatically If the network does not support DHCP the ...

Page 42: ...Select the IP Address 5 Enter the IP address for example 192 168 0 1 The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block con tains 3 numbers in maximum 6 Select the Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for example 255 255 255 0 The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum To assign the IP address manually on the...

Page 43: ... 1 1 Touchscreen on page 41 2 Utility keys see Utility Keys on page 43 3 On Standby see On Standby on page 43 4 Function keys see Function Keys on page 44 5 Keypad see Keypad on page 44 6 Navigation controls see Navigation Controls on page 45 7 USB connectors see Chapter 2 2 1 3 Connectors on page 46 8 Sensor connector see Chapter 2 2 1 3 Connectors on page 46 9 User x input output connectors see ...

Page 44: ...e element that can be clicked by a mouse pointer can also be tapped on the screen to trigger the same behavior Using the touchscreen the following tasks among others can be performed by the tap of your finger Changing a setting Selecting new settings Scrolling through the list of parameters Saving or recalling settings Opening and closing dialogs To imitate a right click by mouse using the touchsc...

Page 45: ...defined instrument state and provide information on the instrument and assistance For more information refer to Chapter 10 General Instrument Functions on page 509 Table 2 1 Utility keys Utility Key Assigned functions Preset Sets the instrument to a defined state Save Rcl Saves and loads instrument setting Accesses the file manager Local Switches from remote control to local manual control Setup A...

Page 46: ...r User Key with a customizable function Keypad The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters including the corresponding units It contains the following keys Table 2 3 Keys on the keypad Type of key Description Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers and special characters in edit dialog boxes Decimal point Inserts a decimal point at the cursor position Sign key Changes the sign of a numeric paramet...

Page 47: ...e default unit key In a dialog box selects the default or focused element Calls the next dialog level Confirms and closes open input windows Backspace key Delets the character to the left of the cursor in editing mode Navigation Controls The navigation controls include a rotary knob navigation keys and the display keys They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes Rotary Kno...

Page 48: ...windows on the display Table 2 6 Display keys Display key Assigned functions Next window Toggles between the active dialogs Home Shows the block diagram Next window Toggles between the open dialogs On Off Toggle Switches highlighted elements or a function block on and off Switches between two or more settings e g items of selection lists At the end of a list the cursor is set on the first entry ag...

Page 49: ...nput levels Do not overload the RF output The maximum permis sible back feed is specified in the data sheet The connector type depends on the installed frequency option see Table 2 8 Table 2 8 Overview of RF connector types depending on the frequency range Required option Connector type R S SMBVB B103 KB106 N female NOTICE Risk of RF connector and cable damage If you tighten the connectors too str...

Page 50: ... connector 11 Pulse Video connector 12 Pulse Ext connector 13 Signal Valid connector 14 Inst Trig connectors 15 IEC 625 IEEE 488 connector 16 Non Volatile Memory 17 19 USB USB In connectors 18 LAN connector 20 AC power supply connection and main power switch 2 2 2 1 Connectors User x Multipurpose connectors The input output signal has to be defined The Table 2 9 lists the signals assigned to the U...

Page 51: ... damaging the HS DIG I Q interface Use active optical QSFP cable with max power class 2 module 2 0 W max power consumption To plug in the cable Hold the QSFP plug by its panes The release tab must be upwards oriented Insert it in the HS Dig I Q cage and push it To disconnect the cable Do not pull the cable itself Puling the cable can damage the cable and the HS Dig I Q connector Pull the release t...

Page 52: ...gs on page 349 Pulse Ext Input for an external pulse modulation signal or an external trigger gate signal for the pulse generator Signal Valid Output signal that marks the valid signal times valid level and frequency for all analog modulations Inst Trig Input for external trigger of sweeps and list mode For detailed information on the sweep modes and the triggering see Chapter 6 10 1 Signal Genera...

Page 53: ...fer to Chapter 2 1 1 6 Turning the Instrument On and Off on page 32 2 3 Trying Out the Instrument This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R S SMBV100B step by step The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the R S SMBV100B user manual Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 2 5 Instrument Control on page 73 Prerequisites The...

Page 54: ... a simple unmodulated signal The R S SMBV100B in this example can be a base unit in its minimal configuration i e with installed R S SMBVB B103 1 On the R S SMBV100B front panel press the Preset key to start out in a defined instrument configuration 2 Set the frequency a On the Status Bar tap the Frequency field b On the on screen keypad enter 1 955 and press the GHz key The on screen keypad close...

Page 55: ... R S SMBV100B to a signal analyzer for example R S FSW to display the generated signal Figure 2 5 Simplified test setup For the required settings of the signal analyzer refer to its user manual or its online help 2 3 2 Generating a Digitally Modulated Signal This example shows you how to generate a simple WCDMA 3GPP QPSK 45 offset signal with the help of the Custom Digital Modulation functionality...

Page 56: ... is not the instrument s preset state but rather the configuration described in Chapter 2 3 1 Generating an Unmodulated Carrier on page 52 1 In the block diagram select Baseband and navigate to the section Misc Cus tom Digital Mod The Custom Digital Modulation dialog opens 2 In the Custom Digital Modulation dialog select General Set according to Stan dard WCDMA 3GPP 3 Select General State On to en...

Page 57: ...n tab and observe the used Modulation Type Figure 2 6 Display of the used modulation type The instrument activates automatically I Q Mod uses the internal trigger and clock signals and generates a WCDMA 3GPP signal modulated with a QPSK 45 offset modulation Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 58: ...ple illustrates the general principle of external triggering and extends the configuration performed in Chapter 2 3 2 Generating a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 53 by the configuration of the required trigger signal and connector settings This test setup requires one signal analyzer like the R S FSW as additional equip ment To start the signal generation synchronous to an external global trig...

Page 59: ... 1 To display an overview of the current mapping of the logical signals to the connec tors perform one of the following In the block diagram select the Trigger Marker Clock status LEDs on the left side of the Baseband block Select Baseband Trigger Marker Clock The instrument uses its internal trigger and clock signals and the default mapping of the marker signals to the connectors 2 To access the ...

Page 60: ...he User 1 2 connectors The User 3 connector is an input for the Global Trigger signal Find the physical location of each connector Use the built in Trigger Marker Clock Show function to display the location of the selected connector A blinking marker on the front rear panel view also indicates the selected connector To reconfigure the trigger settings We assume that the instrument is configured as...

Page 61: ...lobal Trigger The instrument expects an external global trigger event In the current configura tion the Global Trigger signal has to be supplied at the input connector User 2 The Trigger Marker Clock status LEDs in the block diagram confirm that an exter nal trigger signal is selected the signal generation is however stopped Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 62: ...an also send for example a frame trigger signal to the R S SMBV100B The R S SMBV100B acts still as the signal source 2 Use suitable cables to connect the RF and REF OUT connectors of the R S SMBV100B to the signal analyzer or the DUT Upon the receiving of an external trigger event the R S SMBV100B starts the sig nal generation and then generates a continuous signal An Arm stops the signal generati...

Page 63: ...Divider 32 Generated is a periodic marker with marker frequency of 120 KHz The signal is output at the User 1 connector of the R S SMBV100B see Figure 2 8 3 Use a suitable cable to connect the User 1 connector of the R S SMBV100B to the monitoring instrument for example oscilloscope like R S RTO See Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Simplified representation of a test setup for signal monitoring The figure ...

Page 64: ...his example shows you how to use this graphical display to verify the generated sig nal Use the signal generated in Chapter 2 3 4 Enabling and Configuring a Marker Signal on page 60 To access the graphical signal display functionality Perform one of the following a Select Taskbar System Configuration Graphics b On the Taskbar tap the wave icon The Graphics Configuration dialog opens To visualize t...

Page 65: ...ion Diagram displays the 3GPP FDD signal 5 To retrieve more information zoom in In some diagrams you can select Show Marker to measure the distance for example between two signals In principle the zoom in function works like the two finger pinching for magnifying images on your cellphone 6 In the Constellation Diagram dialog select Configure to return to the Graphics Configuration dialog Close the...

Page 66: ...e also Chapter 7 Monitoring Signal Characteristics on page 407 2 3 6 Saving and Recalling Settings To restore the results of our measurements later we save the instrument settings to a file To save the instrument settings to a file We assume a test configuration as described in Chapter 2 3 4 Enabling and Config uring a Marker Signal on page 60 1 Press the Save Rcl key on the front panel 2 In the S...

Page 67: ...u can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file 1 Press the Preset button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the saved user settings are restored afterwards 2 Press the Save Rcl key 3 In the Save Recall dialog select Recall operation Navigate to the directory of the saved file Select the MyTestSignal file Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 68: ...ir preset values When you load a file to your instrument and do not have enough information on the changed settings visualize all parameters that have been changed from their default state Try out the following Tap and hold on an empty space in the block diagram to access the context sensi tive menu Select Mark All Parameters Changed from Preset All changed parameters are highlighted See also Chap...

Page 69: ...provided by the firmware option The example aims rather to help you get familiar with the settings and configuration principle common for the digital standards We use one of the provided EUTRA test models E TM to show how to generate a test signal upon a quick selection 1 On the R S SMBV100B front panel press the Preset key to start out in a defined instrument configuration 2 In the block diagram ...

Page 70: ...A LTE General tab select Test Models The test models is a function for quick selection and settings adjustment according to one of the various EUTRA test models E TM A standard File Select function enables you to select form files with predefined settings Tip On the front panel press the Help key to retrieve detailed information on the current settings and on the contents of the predefined files 4...

Page 71: ...z and 20 dBm Select RF On The instrument generates an EUTRA LTE test signal with the selected channel bandwidth frequency and level With these first steps you have gained an impression of the provided functionality For a comprehensive description of the full range of capabilities refer to the user man ual EUTRA LTE Digital Standard for R S SMBV100B Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 72: ...enerating and processing I Q signals in realtime or generating signals with an arbitrary waveform generator 2 4 2 Signal Flow at a Glance The R S SMBV100B is equipped with a large touchscreen that displays a block dia gram The block diagram represents the signal flow and the general stages the signal generation goes through Depending on the options the R S SMBV100B is equipped with the appearance ...

Page 73: ...tional block excerpt Functional block Required option Baseband BB Input AWGN R S SMBVB K62 I Q Stream Mapper I Q Mod I Q Analog RF R S SMBVB B103 KB106 2 4 3 Internal Baseband Source Baseband Block The Baseband block represents the source of the baseband signals basebands This functional block is the access point to The internal baseband generator The baseband generator contains modules for real t...

Page 74: ...GN An additive white noise is required for measurements of mobile radio base stations 2 4 6 I Q Stream Mapper Block As one of the access points to the system configuration settings the I Q Stream Map per provides direct access for mapping the generated I Q streams to the available out put connectors That is to the analog RF and I Q output connectors 2 4 7 I Q Modulator I Q Mod Block The I Q Mod bl...

Page 75: ...generator using the externally applied digital baseband signals or in an analog wideband I Q operation Generation of a wanted signal or an interfering signal for receiver tests Generation of signals with up to 500 MHz signal bandwidth 2 5 Instrument Control This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R S SMBV100B It covers the following topics Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument ...

Page 76: ... you work with a mouse pointer Tapping the screen works like clicking mouse buttons Touch quickly click Selects a parameter or provokes an action Touch and hold right click Opens a context sensitive menu Touch and swipe drag Scrolls through the contents of a display element larger than the screen e g a list or a table Spread or pinch two fingers zoom out zoom in Increases or decreases the size of ...

Page 77: ...r softkey bar Status Bar 75 Block Diagram 76 Taskbar 77 Additional Display Characteristics 78 2 5 3 1 Status Bar The status bar at the top of the screen indicates the RF frequency and the level of the output signal provided to the DUT You can set both parameters directly here 1 Frequency display 2 Status buttons 3 Level display The status buttons indicate key parameters that are set for the output...

Page 78: ...r you can see the functional blocks provi ded in the baseband domain After the stream mapper the analog section contains the digital to analog conversion and modulation to RF Legend Item Description 1 Status indicator Indicates whether the signal is running or waiting for a trigger 2 Functional block Represents a basic task in signal generation The push button provides access to any number of asso...

Page 79: ...3 Taskbar The Taskbar contains labeled softkeys and minimized views thumbnails of active graphics and dialogs Initially it shows the permanently assigned softkeys The softkey with the sine wave denotes that no signal is activated for graphical representation Figure 2 12 Taskbar in default state Whenever you open a settings or graphics dialog it is automatically assigned to the Taskbar The softkeys...

Page 80: ...ve a blue background Selected elements are framed or highlighted orange Inactive elements are gray On Screen keypads As additional means of interacting with the instrument without having to connect an external keyboard either a numerical or alphanumerical on screen keypad appears when you activate an entry field see Chapter 2 5 5 Entering Data on page 80 Info line The Info line shows brief status ...

Page 81: ...em and function keys on the front panel of the instrument Taskbar softkeys on the touchscreen Context sensitive menus for specific elements on the touchscreen Elements on the status bar in the touchscreen Displayed setting on the touchscreen that means block diagram and all settings available in dialogs To open a dialog box Perform one of the following actions Tap the required block and then the m...

Page 82: ... the required option Or Use the rotary knob Or Use On Off Toggle key to select the succeeding option Or Use the front panel keys a Press the Left Right arrow keys to navigate to the list button b Press the Enter key to open the list c Press the Up Down keys to navigate to the required option in the list d Press the Enter key to select the marked option 2 5 5 Entering Data Some parameters have thei...

Page 83: ...by using the front panel controls 1 Change the currently used parameter value by using the rotary knob or the Up Down keys 2 If the parameter does not require a unit confirm the entered value by pressing the Enter key or any of the unit keys The instrument highlights the editing line to confirm the entry If you edit numeric data in tables the entry field must be in edit mode Press Enter or the rot...

Page 84: ...des functional description on a setting The general help explains a dialog box provides instructions and general informa tion To display context help To access a help topic perform one of the following a Tap and hold the parameter for which you need information and tap Help in the context menu b Tap the parameter and press the Help key The Help dialog opens You can browse the help for further info...

Page 85: ... to the previous page select Back This function scrolls back all steps you have performed before 5 Use the scroll bars to shift the visible section of content shown 6 To maximize the Topics area tap the Hide Contents Tree button to hide the con tents tree Using the index 1 Select the Index button 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these charac...

Page 86: ...is in opera tion the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote computer and VNC provides access to all applications files and network resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the instrument is possible Instrument control from a remote computer To access the basic utility functions of the R S SMBV100B perform a right mouse click on the block diagram and select Key Emulation...

Page 87: ...dards in accordance with the corresponding specifications The required options are specified in the description of the respective digital standard see the corresponding user manual See also Chapter 3 3 Generating Signals According to Digital Standards on page 87 Generating a real time signal While utilizing the internal signal generator the R S SMBV100B generates the dig ital modulation signals wi...

Page 88: ... carriers modulated by different baseband signals can be configured and created internally Such multi carrier waveform files are required to simulate complex multi carrier scenarios with different baseband signals e g CDMA2000 3GPP FDD or signals in accordance with the LTE Advanced specifications See also Chapter 3 8 Generating Multi Carrier Signals on page 223 Provided the instrument is equipped ...

Page 89: ...d Boosting the Baseband Signal on page 250 3 3 Generating Signals According to Digital Standards The R S SMBV100B generates digital signals in accordance with the specifications of the main communication and radio standards only if the corresponding firmware options are installed GSM EDGE EDGE Evolution This digital standard requires an instrument equipped with the GSM EDGE and EDGE Evolution opti...

Page 90: ... For details see the R S SMBV100B TD SCDMA user manual 1xEV DO Rev A and Rev B This digital standard requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV DO Rev A and Rev B options R S SMBVB K47 K87 The 1xEV DO options provide functionality to generate signals in accordance with the CDMA2000 1xEV DO Evolution Data Optimized Rev A and Rev B standard For details see the R S SMBV100B 1xEV DO Rev A Rev B use...

Page 91: ...less of the selected baseband source or digital standard are described here If you are per forming a specific signal generation task like generating a signal according to a digital standard be sure to check the specific description for settings that may deviate from these common settings 3 4 1 Basics on Signals Modulation Types and Filters Used the Base band Domain This section provides general in...

Page 92: ...re externally or internally created binary lists with modulation data The instrument provides standard file select function for loading of existing data lists creating internally new data lists or editing an existing one Internally data lists are created in the dedicated Data List editor see Chapter 3 5 3 7 Data List Editor on page 128 A separate file is created for each list and stored on the ins...

Page 93: ...0 21 bit 221 1 2097151 Registers 2 0 PRBS 21 PN21 23 bit 223 1 8388607 Registers 5 0 PRBS 23 PN23 Example By way of example the diagram on A 9 bit PRBS generator shows a 9 bit generator with feedback to registers 4 and 0 output The generated serial data is converted internally e g 2 Bit Symbol if QPSK is used Figure 3 1 A 9 bit PRBS generator Related settings Chapter 3 5 3 3 Data Source on page 11...

Page 94: ...inuous wave mode A dedicated internal Control Data Editor is provided for defining the control signals Refer to Chapter 3 5 3 8 Control and Marker Lists Editor on page 130 for a descrip tion on the provided settings Continuous Wave Mode The CW signal turns off digital modulation The signal is output in unmodulated form The CW Mod control signal is generated internally and is output at one of the U...

Page 95: ...ware options are equipped with embed ded power ramping function In the GSM EDGE standard for example a maximum of 7 different level attenuation values can be defined and allocated separately to the 8 slots independently of one another Impact of the Power Ramping Settings on the Generated Signal The Figure 3 2 explains the power ramping function in principle The Burst Gate sig nal defines the start...

Page 96: ...settings Chapter 3 4 2 2 Marker Settings on page 113 Chapter 10 2 Configuring the Global Connectors on page 515 Marker settings in the dialogs of the firmware options Marker Modes The marker mode is a characteristic for the shape and the periodicity of the marker The R S SMBV100B provides several different modes to define different marker sig nals Most of them are specific for each of the firmware...

Page 97: ...Divider respectively Frequency Sampling Frequency Divider Example Symbol Rate 1 Msym s Divider 2 The marker frequency is 500 kHz corresponding to a marker period of 2 us Each On and Off period has a length of 1 us corresponding to one symbol period With a divider of 4 6 8 the length of each On and Off period is increased to 2 3 4 symbol periods Marker mode pattern Periodic marker where each period...

Page 98: ...le peri ods 3 4 1 3 Baseband Trigger Signals The R S SMBV100B provides several trigger modes different trigger sources and some additional trigger settings to suppress or delay the trigger events This section provides an overview of the provided baseband trigger settings and the impact of the trigger settings on the signal generation The current signal generation status Running or Stopped is conti...

Page 99: ...onfigure the required settings External Baseband Sync In In master slave mode slave instruments are triggered by the active edge of the synchronization signal This trigger source is selected automatically and cannot be changed See Chapter 8 3 1 Connecting Multiple Instruments in Master Slave Mode on page 428 The trigger mode setting the selection of the trigger source and the setting of a delay an...

Page 100: ...ns that the signal is generated repeatedly without delay and until the data generation is stopped explicitly However any parameter change within the processing chain baseband fading simulator or stream mapping causes a signal generation restart The following is a list of the trigger modes together with their short description An example of their impact on the generated signal is given The provided...

Page 101: ...al Duration Auto In auto trigger mode the instrument generates a continuous signal Figure 3 5 Trigger mode auto Retrigger The instrument generates a continuous signal With enabled retrigger a new trig ger event aborts the current generation cycle and restarts the signal generation from the beginning Figure 3 6 Trigger mode retrigger Common Functions and Settings in the Baseband Domain ...

Page 102: ...n Figure 3 7 Trigger mode armed auto Armed retrigger The instrument starts the signal generation only when a trigger event occurs and then generates a continuous signal Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart of the signal generation An Arm stops the signal generation A subsequent trigger event causes a restart Figure 3 8 Trigger mode armed retrigger Impact of the Additional Trigger Settin...

Page 103: ...can cause problems if short signal sequences are gen erated To overcome this problem the instrument provides the special parameter Sync Output to External Trigger If this parameter is disabled the signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0 That is the com plete signal is output compare both figures in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Impact of the parameter Sync Output ...

Page 104: ...es the trigger suppression for a definable number of frames and yet the signal can still be generated synchro nously In each frame the base station generates a trigger which would cause a signal generation restart every time but for the suppression Example A trigger delay of 1000 samples means that after a trigger event any subsequent trig ger signal is ignored for the space of 1000 samples Figure...

Page 105: ...External Delay Unit Time ARB Trigger In Specified External Delay 10 us Logically the Actual External Delay changes to 10 us Step 3 Switch to ARB Trigger In External Delay Unit Samples The value of ARB Trigger In External Delay is 10 samples Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals In test setups that combine the signal of two or more instruments it is often required that The signal generation start...

Page 106: ...o broadcasting DVB The QAM procedures 256QAM and 1024QAM are not specified in this stan dard but have been produced according to the same basic principles In the case of all FSK procedures you can set the symbol rate fSYMB up to a maximum value see data sheet The frequency deviation FSK deviation of the MSK modula tion is permanently set to of the symbol rate In addition to the common modulation s...

Page 107: ...S SMBV100B offers a wide selection of predefined baseband filters The predefined filters are designed for the special spec trum characteristics of the different communication standards However depending on the selected filter form one or more filter parameters are provided for even more pre cise adjustment of the filter characteristic You can select for example more steeper edges or change the tra...

Page 108: ...andwidth of the desired signal is allowed to pass and adjust the filter form to reach the spectrum mask requirements Cut Off Frequency The cut off frequency or corner frequency is a filter characteristic that defines the fre quency at the 3 dB down point This frequency is bound to the transition band here the filter characteristic changes form the passband to the stopband where the signal is suppr...

Page 109: ...andards can have high crest factors also particularly with many channels and long sequences The crest factor represents the ratio of the peak voltage value to the RMS voltage value i e the peak to average ratio PAR The higher the crest factor and the resulting dynamics of a signal the greater the requirement for a power amplifier fed by the sig nal to be linear A high crest factor arises for insta...

Page 110: ...eral of the firmware options like 3GPP FDD or CDMA2000 the instrument provides the possibility to enable baseband clipping and to select the baseband filter and when applicable to adjust the filter characteristics Clipping is a technique that applies a wanted distortion to the signal The principle includes specifying a threshold finding out the signal peaks once the defined limits are exceeded and...

Page 111: ...follows a repeating dialog structure that com prises the tabs General Trigger In Marker and Clock The General tab comprises the primary settings of the standard the functions for storing and recalling settings It also provides access to further functions and dialogs like the Filter settings The Trigger In Marker and Clock tabs comprise the settings related to the corre sponding function In the fol...

Page 112: ...gs Access Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Trigger In This tab comprises the settings for selecting and configuring the trigger like trigger source mode and delay and to arm or trigger an internal trigger manually The current signal generation status is displayed in the header of the tab together with information on the enabled trigger mode As in the Marker and Clock tabs this tab provides also ...

Page 113: ... generation for all trigger modes Running The signal is generated a trigger was internally or externally initiated in triggered mode Stopped The signal is not generated and the instrument waits for a trigger event Remote command SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger RMODe on page 726 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger RMODe on page 774 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger RMODe on page 791 Arm Stops the signal generation unti...

Page 114: ... on page 100 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 726 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 775 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 791 External Trigger Inhibit Sets the duration with that any following trigger event is suppressed In Retrigger mode for example a new trigger event does not cause a restart o...

Page 115: ...in time units on page 102 The parameter Actual Trigger Delay Actual External Delay displays the delay conver ted in time Remote command SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal DELay on page 727 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal TDELay on page 727 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal DELay on page 775 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal TDELay on page 776 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal DELay on ...

Page 116: ...MODE on page 728 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider on page 729 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency on page 730 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern on page 729 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime on page 729 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime on page 729 ARB see Marker Mode on page 159 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch MODE on page 793 SOURce hw BB MC...

Page 117: ...and clock mode Settings Clock Source 115 Clock Source Selects the clock source Internal The instrument uses its internal clock reference Clock Signals on page 91 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk SOURce on page 730 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk SOURce on page 778 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk SOURce on page 795 3 4 2 4 Global Connector Settings Each of the Trigger In Marker and Clock dialogs as well a...

Page 118: ...e coding schemes listed in Chapter 3 5 5 1 Common Coding Algorithms on page 140 are not freely combinable with modulation methods Obviously having selected a modulation procedure not every combination of the fur ther modulation parameters Symbol Rate and Coding is possible These restrictions inevitably result in conflicting settings if you change a parameter and leads to a prohibi ted combination ...

Page 119: ...Trigger Marker and Clock Setting 119 Data Source 119 Modulation Settings 121 Filter Settings 124 Power Ramp Control Settings 126 Data List Editor 128 Control and Marker Lists Editor 130 3 5 3 1 General Settings Access Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod This tab provides access to the default and the save recall settings and to a quick selection of a digital modulation according to predefined commu...

Page 120: ... are self explanatory The filename and the directory in which the settings are stored are user definable the file extension is however predefined See also Chapter 9 File and Data Management on page 471 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM SETTing CATalog on page 717 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing DELete on page 718 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing LOAD on page 717 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing STORe on page 717 Set according...

Page 121: ...hich the selected coding is not available automatically disables the coding Coding Off Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CODing on page 720 Power Ramp Control Accesses the power ramp control dialog see Chapter 3 5 3 6 Power Ramp Control Settings on page 126 3 5 3 2 Trigger Marker and Clock Setting These tabs provide standard settings For detailed description see Chapter 3 4 2 1 Trigger Settings on pa...

Page 122: ...nternally generated PRBS PRBS Type Selects internally generated PRBS data in accordance with the IUT T Use the parameter PRBS Type to define the length Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRBS LENGth on page 716 Pattern Use the Pattern box to define a bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PATTern on page 716 Data List Binary data from data lists are used see Select...

Page 123: ...d Select List dialog to select an existing control list or to create a new one Control lists can be generated externally or internally in the Control and Marker Lists editor Select the Select Control List navigate to the list file dm_iqc Select to select an existing control list Use the standard File Manager function to transfer external lists to the instrument Use the New and Edit functions to cr...

Page 124: ...ics refer to Chapter 3 4 1 4 Suppor ted Modulation Types on page 104 Settings Modulation Type 122 Load User Mapping 123 ASK Depth 123 FSK Deviation 123 Angle Alpha 123 FSK Type 123 Deviation xxxx 124 Gamma Gamma 1 124 State Modulation CW Switching 124 Modulation Type Selects a modulation type The associated symbol mapping is displayed If the selected Coding is not allowed with the configured modul...

Page 125: ...demax Amplitudemin Remote command SOURce hw BB DM ASK DEPTh on page 721 FSK Deviation Sets the frequency deviation for FSK modulation The range of values depends on the selected Symbol Rate see data sheet Whenever MSK is selected the deviation corresponds to 1 4 of the symbol rate and cannot be changed Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FSK DEViation on page 721 Angle Alpha For AQPSK modulation sets t...

Page 126: ...BB DM APSK16 GAMMa on page 722 SOURce hw BB DM APSK32 GAMMa on page 722 State Modulation CW Switching Enables disables switching between the digitally modulated and an unmodulated CW signal Remote command SOURce hw BB DM SWITching STATe on page 723 3 5 3 5 Filter Settings Access Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Filter This tab provides access to the filter settings like filter type and if availa...

Page 127: ... The filter parameter offered Rolloff Factor or BxT depends on the currently selected filter type Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25 on page 718 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine ROLLoff on page 718 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter GAUSs on page 718 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter PGAuss on page 718 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter RCOSine on page 719 SOURce hw BB DM FIL...

Page 128: ...or f 1 Rolloff Bandwidth 2 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine BANDwidth on page 718 Load User Filter Calls the dialog Select User Filter for selecting a user defined filter file with extension vaf see User filter on page 105 The dialog provides access to the standard file management functions like store load delete Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FLISt SELect on page 731 SOURce ...

Page 129: ...the source for the power ramp control signals Internal The control signals as defined in the internal control list are used for control purposes See also Chapter 3 5 4 1 How to Create and Assign a Control List on page 134 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp SOURce on page 723 Ramp Function Selects the ramp function that describes the shape of the rising and falling edges dur ing power ramp contro...

Page 130: ...Ramping and Level Attenuation on page 92 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp ATTenuation on page 724 In Baseband Only Restricts power ramping to the baseband signal Off Level attenuation is affected via the attenuator stages in the RF sec tion only the remaining part is attenuated in the baseband The sig nal is issued at the RF output with the defined level values On Level attenuation is affected...

Page 131: ...groups of four The current cursor position the length of the list and the list filename are displayed above the list The offset starts with the value 0 which corresponds to the bit position on the left side of the first row i e the beginning of the list On the left edge of the editor the last three offset positions are specified at the beginning of the row An existing list can be edited in the ins...

Page 132: ...file Show Hide Keyboard Accesses a virtual keyboard to enter Hex Bin values 3 5 3 8 Control and Marker Lists Editor The R S SMBV100B provides the following ways to create a file containing control sig nals To use the tag oriented format and create a control list file see To create a control list using tag file format on page 173 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format see To create...

Page 133: ...define the ramp for the individual markers or control signals tap on the desired position or use the provided support functions Signal Table and Cursor Position To simplify the settings use the predefined preset ramp charac teristics in the Signal Preset Type section The scaling of the x axis is always adapted to the overall length of the control list to provide constant overview of all defined ra...

Page 134: ...Total List Length Enters the length of the definition range of the control list in bits The starting value is always bit 0 The entire definition range is displayed i e the bit scale is adapted to the entry If the definition range is decreased the ramps outside the range are lost When used the control list is always repeated over the length of the definition range if the length of the data list exc...

Page 135: ...cal display If the entered value exceeds the selected length of the definition range the length is adjusted automatically Remote command n a Positions Control Signal Select Edit to access a dialog with representation of the ramps of the selected sig nal in table form The bit position is specified in the Ramp Position column the high or low signal sta tus in the Ramp State column Use the last blank...

Page 136: ...ng control sig nals To use the dedicated Control and Marker Lists Editor and create a file in ASCII for mat and with extension dm_iqc see To create a control list in ASCII format manually on page 134 To use the tag oriented format and create a control list file see To create a control list using tag file format on page 173 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format see To create a con...

Page 137: ...ed area are not lost Figure 3 10 Example of control list settings 3 Select Save or Save As to store the used settings as a control list file The created file is an ASCII file with the extension dm_iqc Enable the instrument to use the control list e g for the marker and or other con trol signals Enabled control signals are indicated as active in the Configure Control Signal section How to assign an...

Page 138: ...e and Assign a Data List The R S SMBV100B provides the following ways to create a data list file To use the dedicated Data List Editor and create a file with extension dm_iqd see To create data lists manually on page 136 To use the tag oriented format and create a data list file see To create a data list file using tag file format on page 175 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format...

Page 139: ...stom digital modulation a Select Baseband Custom Digital Modulation Data Source Data List b Select Select Data List c Navigate through the file system Select the file and confirm with Select 2 To enable the R S SMBV100B to use the data list as data source for any of the digital standards a Select the Data List Name in the individual dialog For example for Baseband 3GPP FDD Basestations BS1 Channel...

Page 140: ...4FSK Deviation 1 8 KHz 4 8 ksym s APCO25 roll off 0 2 APCO25 FSK APCOPH1C4fm APCO Phase1 CQPSK pi 4 DQPSK 4 8 ksym s Cosine roll off 0 2 BW 4 8 KHz APCO25 PSK APCOPH1CQpsk APCO Phase2 H CPM 4FSK Deviation 3 KHz 6 ksym s APCO25 H CPM APCO25 FSK APCOPH2HCpm APCO Phase2 H DQPSK pi 4 DQPSK 6 ksym s Cosine roll off 1 BW 7 2 KHz APCO25 PSK APCOPH2HDQpsk APCO Phase2 H D8PSK Wide pi 8 D8PSK 4 ksym s Cosin...

Page 141: ...SK 18 0 ksym s Root cosine alpha 0 35 TETRA TETRa WCDMA 3GPP QPSK 45 Offset 3 84 Msym s Root cosine alpha 0 22 WCDMA 3GPP W3GPp TD SCDMA QPSK 45 Offset 1 28 Msym s Root cosine alpha 0 22 OFF TCSCdma cdma2000 Forward QPSK 1 2288 Msym s cdmaOne Equalizer cdma2000 CFORward cdma2000 Reverse Offset QPSK 1 2288 Msym s cdmaOne cdma2000 CREVerse Worldspace QPSK 1 84 Msym s Root cosine alpha 0 40 OFF WORLd...

Page 142: ...X 32FSK X 64FSK X 16QAM X X X X X 16QAM EDGE X 32QAM X X X X X 32QAM EDGE X 64QAM X X X X X 128QAM X X X X X 256QAM X X X X X 1024QAM X X X X X 16APSK X 32APSK X 3 5 5 1 Common Coding Algorithms In the notation used below an denotes the nth input symbol and bn denotes the corre spondingly coded output symbol Individual bits in the symbols from the LSB least sig nificant bit to the MSB most signifi...

Page 143: ...following examples illustrate how some of the different common coding schemes combined with a modulation method influence the signal Example Differential coding for QPSK modulation with K 2 bit symbol Decimal display the value range for modulation symbols is an 0 1 2 3 According to Table 3 8 and for k 2 the recursive coding is defined as bn an b 1 modulo 4 Depending on the state of a preceding mod...

Page 144: ...l coding The later uses the recursive coding algorithm quoted above see Table 3 8 The assignment of modulation symbols an binary indi cation MSB LSB to the phase differences shown in the following table is generated Table 3 11 Differential coding according to VDL1 Modulation symbol dn 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Phase difference 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 1 Differential coding according to VD...

Page 145: ...d filters Cosine raised cosine Rolloff factor Bandwidth Root cosine root raised cosine RRC Rolloff factor Gauss FSK BxT Pure gauss BxT Gauss linearized Edge narrow pulse shape Edge wide pulse shape cdmaOne cdmaOne 705 kHz cdmaOne Equalizer cdmaOne 705 kHz Equalizer cdma2000 3X Generating Custom Digital Modulated Signals ...

Page 146: ... Internal Baseband Source R S SMBV100B 144 User Manual 1178 4460 02 03 APCO25 Rolloff factor APCO25 H CPM APCO25 LSM Gauss cutoff frequency Split Phase BxT Rectangular Dirac Generating Custom Digital Modulated Signals ...

Page 147: ...se unit incl arbitrary waveform generator Corresponding digital standard option R S SMBVB K2xx K4xx Required to process a waveform file generated by the signal generation software R S WinIQSIM2 For example if you purchase option Digital Standard EUTRA LTE R S SMBVB K255 you can process EUTRA LTE waveform files generated by R S WinIQSIM2 Corresponding R S Pulse Sequencer option Optional ARB memory ...

Page 148: ...information on how to query them or to create waveforms manually refer to Chapter 3 6 5 Tags for Waveforms Data and Control Lists on page 177 Waveform file sources Depending on whether the R S SMBV100B creates the waveform files itself or not two waveform files sources can be distinguished Internally generated waveforms The ARB generator enables the calculation and the generation of multi segment ...

Page 149: ...n page 176 3 6 2 2 ARB Test Signals The following test signals are available Sine Test Signal Two sinewave signals with a selectable but equal number of samples per period and equal frequencies When the generation is triggered the number of samples per period together with the frequency of the test signal deter mines the ARB clock frequency Clock Frequency Frequency Samples per Period Note Because...

Page 150: ...e selectable but constant They are defined as a decimal number which is decimal to binary con verted internally The signal is provided as a 16 bit wide digital signal for both I and Q channels Converted to analog the signal is output directly at the BNC connectors I and Q outputs of the instrument 3 6 2 3 Waveform Sample Rate The Arbitrary Waveform Generator includes a resampling unit that interpo...

Page 151: ...generated by the R S WinIQSIM2 software can be optimized by choosing a suitable integer oversampling factor Conventional ARB generators often assume oversampling factors of 4 The ARB gen erator of the R S SMBV100B requires low oversampling factors and still provides excellent signal quality in terms of EVM and ACP A reduced sample rate saves significantly the amount of memory or allows an increase...

Page 152: ...of 256 MB yields a maximum waveform length of 58 Msamples if three markers are enabled The maximum waveform length increases to 64 Msam ples if the internal hardware markers are used and the complete memory is available for I Q data The minimum length of a waveform is 512 samples A waveform shorter than this value is automatically repeated until it reaches the minimum length 3 6 3 ARB Settings Acc...

Page 153: ...ent waveform is loaded the tab expands and displays the dedicated section Multi Segment Waveform Options This section comprises the settings necessary to configure the segment to be out put and adjust the trigger for the switch between the segments of the multi seg ment waveform The parameters displayed depend on the selected trigger source The provided parameters are identical with the parameters...

Page 154: ... to Load Waveform An error message indicates that no or empty waveform file is selected Select a waveform file before switching on the ARB Missing burst gate marker in the waveform but RF Power Ramping with Burst Gate Marker On If RF Power Ramping with Burst Gate Marker On but the loaded ARB waveform does not contain control list or the burst gate marker is not defined the ARB gener ator cannot be...

Page 155: ...ected waveform file is a multi segment one or not All parameters are read only Remote command For non multi segment waveform files use the Tag commands see Chapter 3 6 5 Tags for Waveforms Data and Control Lists on page 177 Clock Frequency Displays or sets the ARB output clock rate The value of this parameter is set to the clock rate defined in the loaded waveform file CLOCK tag The value can be c...

Page 156: ...th constant I Q is provided To access further settings select Create Test Signal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary SIGNal TYPE on page 746 RF Power Ramping with Burst Marker Option R S SMBVB K22 If activated the burst gate marker signal included in the ARB waveform file is used as marker signal for the pulse modulator If this parameter is activated but the loaded ARB waveform does not contain ...

Page 157: ...tion refer to Chap ter 3 6 2 2 ARB Test Signals on page 147 The dialog displays the characteristic of the currently selected signal Settings Frequency 155 Samples per Period 155 Phase Offset Q 156 Generate Signal File 156 Generate Signal RAM 156 Frequency Enters the frequency of the test signal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency on page 748 Samples per Period Enters the n...

Page 158: ...al File Generates a signal and saves it as a waveform file on the hard disk Use the standard File Select function to store this file Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate NAMed on page 749 Generate Signal RAM Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away The instrument stores the file with a predefined name Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate on p...

Page 159: ...rectangular signal per period The maximum allowed value is determined by the maximum ARB clock rate see data sheet and the selected frequency Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle SAMPles on page 748 Amplitude Enters the digital amplitude of the rectangular wave The abbreviation FS means full scale Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle AMPLitude on page 747 Offs...

Page 160: ... For more information refer to Chapter 3 6 2 2 ARB Test Signals on page 147 Converted to analog the signal is output directly at the I and Q connectors of the instrument Settings I Value Q Value 158 Generate Signal File 158 Generate Signal RAM 159 I Value Q Value Enters the value for the I respectively Q component of the test signal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ I on page 746 S...

Page 161: ...alog change with the selected marker mode Use the settings to define the shape and periodicity of the markers See Regular Marker Output Signals for description of the regular marker signals Note The marker trace in the waveform file remains unchanged in any case It is not overwritten even if something else than Unchanged has been selected The instrument routes the generated marker signals to the s...

Page 162: ... R S WinIQSIM2 see Chapter 3 6 4 4 How to Create a Waveform File with the R S WinIQSIM2 and Load it in the ARB on page 162 With the software R S ARB Toolbox With the R S SMBVB K300 K301 Pulse Sequencer software Calculated using a mathematical program such as MATLAB see Chap ter 3 6 4 5 How to Manually Create a Waveform Using Tag File Format on page 167 Provided the R S SMBV100B is equipped with th...

Page 163: ...ory tree e g var user Enter a filename e g lte_waveform Select Save The R S SMBV100B stores the generated waveform file lte_waveform wv under the selected directory var user To process the waveform file load it in the ARB see Chapter 3 6 4 3 How to Load and Play Waveform Files on page 161 3 6 4 3 How to Load and Play Waveform Files Irrespectively on the way a waveform file is generated you can tra...

Page 164: ...d working with the R S WinIQSIM2 refer to description R S WinIQSIM2 User Manual To configure the R S SMBV100B as destination instrument in the R S WinIQ SIM2 In this example we assume that the R S WinIQSIM2 is installed on a remote control ler This remote controller is connected over LAN to the R S SMBV100B The general instrument settings of the destination instrument affect various functions like...

Page 165: ...se the dialog 5 In the block diagram select Vector Sig Gen block and select the R S SMBV100B form the list 6 In the block diagram select ARB Sig Gen block and select the R S SMBV100B form the list The two lines to the Vector Sig Gen and ARB Sig Gen blocks on the block dia gram confirm that a remote connection to the R S SMBV100B is established Using the Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB ...

Page 166: ... with the R S WinIQSIM2 1 In the block diagram of R S WinIQSIM2 select Baseband EUTRA LTE IoT 2 Adjust the settings as required for example a select Link Direction Downlink b select a predefined test model Test Setups Models E TM1_1__10MHz 3 Enable EUTRA LTE IoT State On Using the Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB ...

Page 167: ...eband Source R S SMBV100B 165 User Manual 1178 4460 02 03 The R S WinIQSIM2 calculates the signal and displays important signal parame ters like the used Sample Rate and Number of Samples Using the Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB ...

Page 168: ... to the R S SMBV100B 1 In the R S WinIQSIM2 select Transmission Transmit 2 In the Waveform Transmission to Arbitrary Waveform Generator dialog select a Transmit from Internal WinIQSIM2 b Transmit to Instrument c Select File and define the filename the transmitted file is stored as d Enable Automatically Load and Start Waveform On and select the required baseband e g Path A e Add a comment to the w...

Page 169: ... File Format The provided example uses a sine function in the I channel and a cosine function in the Q channel each with 20 points The example uses a short program written in the pro gramming language C to calculate the sine and cosine values see Example C pro gram for creating a waveform file on page 170 They are stored in the file SICO txt The decimal values in SICO txt are normalized such that ...

Page 170: ...inciple of creating a waveform manually The following steps outline how to create the waveform file SICO wv 1 Calculate the sine and cosine values e g use the SICO cpp program The result is stored in the file SICO txt Figure 3 14 Contents of SICO txt first column Sine I second column Cosine Q 2 Convert the values from the file SICO txt into binary format consisting of 16 bit signed integer numbers...

Page 171: ...cessed CLOCK LEVEL OFFS An example of the SICO wv file contents could be TYPE SMU WV 0 CLOCK 10e6 LEVEL OFFS 3 010300 0 000000 0000FF7F8E27BB79 72D8BB79 To simplify the example the checksum is set to 0 i e the instrument does not eval uate a checksum Tip The tags TYPE CLOCK LEVEL OFFS and WAVEFORM are mandatory for each waveform All other tags are optional and can be inserted after the TYPE tag in...

Page 172: ...e present example The following figure shows this waveform in a data editor Example C program for creating a waveform file C program SICO cpp for creating the file SICO txt containing 20 sine and cosine pairs converting them into binary data and creating the waveform file SICO wv SICO cpp Defines the entry point for the console application include stdafx h include stdlib h include stdio h include ...

Page 173: ...ose fp_sour return 1 Write required tags to waveform file fprintf fp_dest TYPE SMU WV 0 fprintf fp_dest CLOCK 10e6 fprintf fp_dest SAMPLES d samples RMS Peak fprintf fp_dest LEVEL OFFS f f 1 0f 20 0f log10 1 0f sqrt 2 0f 0 0f fprintf fp_dest WAVEFORM d samples 4 1 for i 0 i samples i Read I Q pair from ASCII file if fscanf fp_sour f f i_float q_float EOF break Convert I Q pair to unsigned short i_...

Page 174: ... in the example on Figure 3 16 consists of 3 frames each frame is 100 samples long The waveform is processed continuously Trigger Mode Auto Figure 3 16 Example Defining marker traces CONTROL LENGTH tag is not used To define a restart marker and a frame start marker use the following tags 1 The waveform is 300 samples long i e set SAMPLES 300 2 Set two TRACE LIST tags For Marker 1 that acts as a re...

Page 175: ... Data Editor and create a file in ASCII format and with extension dm_iqc see To create a control list in ASCII format manually on page 134 To use the tag oriented format and create a data list file see To create a data list file using tag file format on page 175 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format see To create a data list in binary format on page 176 To create a control list u...

Page 176: ...eated control list in the Control Data Editor Compare the displayed ramp values of Marker 1 and the Total List Length with the values in the corresponding tags Note In the provided example the tags have been separated by line breaks for better reading See also Example How to assign and activate control signals from a control list on page 175 To create a control list in binary format Generation of ...

Page 177: ...eate a Data List Using Tag File Format The R S SMBV100B provides the following ways to create a data list file To use the dedicated Data List Editor and create a file with extension dm_iqd see To create data lists manually on page 136 To use the tag oriented format and create a data list file see To create a data list file using tag file format on page 175 To use SCPI commands and create a file in...

Page 178: ...ar user The following example shows how to enable the R S SMBV100B to use this data list as data source for the custom digital modulation MMEM CDIRectory var user SOURce1 BB DM DLISt CATalog Response dl SOURce1 BB DM DLISt SELect dl 3 6 4 9 Editing Waveform Files Data and Control Lists You can edit the internally and externally crated waveform files data and control lists The waveform data and con...

Page 179: ... integer value defining the number of bytes from the colon to the end brace Rules Each waveform file must begin with the TYPE tag The sequence of the remaining tags is arbitrary For each tag an indication shows whether it must be included in the file concerned mandatory or may be included optional Unknown tags are not analyzed by the R S SMBV100B they are left unchanged and saved without an error ...

Page 180: ...ists on the target medium it is over written Setting parameters magic Designates the file type and has the following values SMU WV A valid R S SMBV100B waveform SMU MWV A valid R S SMBV100B multi segment waveform SMU DL A valid R S SMBV100B data list SMU CL A valid R S SMBV100B control list xxxxxxxx Is an ASCII coded checksum of the data part of the WAVEFORM tag in the file This value is always 0 ...

Page 181: ...except the closing curly bracket Example COMMENT File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels BB ARB WAV TAG COMMENT Queries the content of the COMMENT tag of the selected wave form file Response File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels The comment on the waveform reads File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels Usage Setting only COPYRIGHT string The tag contains an ASCII string of arbitrary length ...

Page 182: ...State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 HOP LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 LEVATT LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 MAP LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 MARKER LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 TRACE LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1 IxQx IN 1QN 1 185 MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT NumOfSeg 186 MWV_SEGMENT_LE...

Page 183: ...rocessed in particular the way traces are repeated see Figure 3 18 Figure 3 18 Example Processing of MARKER TRACE if CONTROL LENGHT is specified If the CONTROL LENGTH tag is not used the marker and control list length are deter mined by the last position that is the last Pos State couple defined in the particular TRACE LIST tag see Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 Example Processing of MARKER TRACE if CONT...

Page 184: ...ddresses of the WAVEFORM tag and the hash sign in the EMPTYTAG The WAVEFORM tag always starts at hex address 4000 Example TYPE SMU WV 837236424 COPYRIGHT 2003 Rohde Schwarz SMU DATE 2012 07 11 14 38 01 SAMPLES 80000 CLOCK 8666666 666666666 VECTOR MAX 1 000000038569158 LEVEL OFFS 3 333553817875577e 07 0 MARKER LIST 1 0 1 1 0 1249 0 MARKER LIST 2 0 1 1 0 1249 0 MARKER LIST 3 0 1 1 0 1249 0 MARKER LI...

Page 185: ...PeakOffset_dB value indicates that overrange is likely for some samples i e clipping might occur The crest factor can be calculated from the two values as fol lows Crest Factor PeakOffset_dB RMSOffset_dB Example LEVEL OFFS 3 45 2 BB ARB WAV TAG LEVEL OFFS Queries the content of the LEVEL OFFS tag of the selected waveform file Response 3 45 2 The level of the waveform is below full scale clipping d...

Page 186: ...AMPLES tag of the selected wave form file Response 1000 The waveform contains 1000 I Q samples Usage Setting only See also Chapter 3 6 4 6 How to Define Periodically Repeating Traces on page 172 BURST LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 CW MODE LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 HOP LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 LEVATT LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 ...

Page 187: ...pecifies the binary state of the marker or of the control signal from PosN to PosN 1 exclusive in ASCII format Example MARKER LIST 1 0 0 10 1 20 0 30 1 BB DM CLIS TAG MARKER LIST 1 Queries the content of the MARKER LIST 1 tag of the selected control list file Response 0 0 10 1 20 0 30 1 The marker setting for samples 0 to 9 0 low for 10 to 19 1 high and for 20 to 29 0 From sample 30 onward the mar...

Page 188: ...e collectively waveform I Q stream The number of segments and the start offset and length of the individual segments inside the total waveform I Q stream is determined by the additional tags MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT MWV_SEGMENT_START and MWV_SEGMENT_LENGTH Further MWV_SEGMENT_ tags are also available for example for level and clock information Example One segment waveform WAVEFORM 401 I0 Q0 I1 Q1 I2 Q2 I...

Page 189: ...nt 1 The start offset of first segment is 0 samples start offset of next segment 1 is the sample length of segment 0 100 samples Usage Setting only MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE Mode mandatory for multi segment waveforms The tag contains a string in ASCII format which supplies the clock rate mode that was used for calculation of the multi segment output waveform see also Clock on page 206 The tag CLOCK c...

Page 190: ...ti segment waveforms The tag contains a list of level pairs in ASCII floating point format one pair for every segment in the multi segment waveform The first value of a level pair defines the rms offset and the second value the peak offset relative to the 16 bit full scale modulation 32767 32767 0 dB The meaning of one level value pair is the same as in the LEVEL OFFS tag for normal waveforms Exam...

Page 191: ...TROL LENGTH tag has to contain the number of all marker elements m Figure 3 20 Marker element in 4 bit binary format bit order For standard waveforms the MARKER LIST x tags are a more compact way to define markers In principle however the CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 format can also be used instead of the MARKER LIST x tags For multi segment waveforms the CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 format is required for marker d...

Page 192: ...1 mandatory for data lists The tag contains the actual bit sequence of the data list in binary format Setting parameters Length Defines the number of bytes in the DATA LIST tag in ASCII Format see WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1 IxQx IN 1QN 1 for details dx Data bits in binary format 8 bit unsigned characters MSB first Example DATA LIST 17 d0d1 dx d127 16 bytes containing 128 data bits first bit is the M...

Page 193: ...control list length are deter mined by the last position that is the last Pos State couple defined in the particular TRACE LIST tag see Figure 3 19 Figure 3 22 Example Processing of MARKER TRACE if CONTROL LENGHT is not used To maintain marker signals and waveform data synchronized set the CONTROL LENGTH to be equal to the number of samples specified with the tag SAMPLES See also Chapter 3 6 4 6 H...

Page 194: ...e ignored 1 to 3 Sets the marker or control trace number supported is only LEVATT LIST 1 Pos Specifies in ASCII format the position i e sample number or data value with effect from which the binary State of the marker or of the control signal changes If the tag MARKER MODE is used the maximum number of marker states is 64 i e Pos63 State63 State 0 1 Specifies the binary state of the marker or of t...

Page 195: ...ntroduces the concept of the multi segment waveform files together with description of the provided settings and some typical configuration examples 3 7 1 Required Options See Chapter 3 6 1 Required Options on page 145 Multi segment waveform files require the corresponding Digital Standard options R S SMBV100B K2xx of all included standards 3 7 2 About the Multi Segment Waveforms A multi segment w...

Page 196: ...a sequence of different segments and to determine whether a segment is played once or repeated several times and to adjust the transition between the segments For the correct and fast processing and for seamless transition between the multiple waveforms segments with a common sample rate are required If the combined wave forms features different sample rates they have to be adapted to a common sam...

Page 197: ...ut necessary corrections in the play list 3 7 2 4 Impact of the Marker Settings The general purpose of the marker signal is the triggering of the DUT device under test and the synchronization with other measurement instruments For better flexibility the instrument provides several possibilities to define marker sig nals Segment markers Because the multiple segments are standalone waveforms they ca...

Page 198: ...ettings The ARB dialog is equipped with the standard regular trigger settings These settings are provided for triggering of the composed multi segment waveform as a sequence i e as one file The functions provided in the Trigger tab and their effect are descri bed in Chapter 3 4 1 3 Baseband Trigger Signals on page 96 This section focuses on the additional settings provided for triggering of the in...

Page 199: ...cally output the segments in the multi segment file Defining Next Segment Source As with the standard trigger system provided are the following two sources for the next segment signal Internal the switch over to the subsequent segment is triggered manually with the Execute Next Segment function To trigger a switch over to any segment within the multi segment waveform change the value of the parame...

Page 200: ...generate a multi segment signal without signal gaps between the segments is to use the provided ARB sequencer mode see Chapter 3 7 3 4 Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing on page 207 The Table 3 14 shows two examples of the transition from a sine wave signal segment to a sawtooth segment I channel upper curve in the case of next segment external triggering The left graphic displays an abrupt transit...

Page 201: ...Next Segment Mode Next Segment Seamless 3 7 3 Multi Segment Settings Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Create Multi Segment The ARB Multi Segment dialog enables direct assignment of waveforms to the multiple segments adjusting the clock level and marker settings of the composed waveform and selecting the output file For description on the provided settings refer to Chapter 3 7 3 1 Setting for H...

Page 202: ... State On to process the configured multi segment waveform The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 4 3 SOURce BB ARBitrary Subsystem on page 737 Setting for Handling the Multi Segment Files and Output File Settings 200 Segment Table 202 Level Clock Marker Settings 205 Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing 207 Next Segment Trigger In Settings 212 3 7 3 1 Se...

Page 203: ... List As Saves the current entries of the Segment Table in a configuration list file including the level mode clock mode segment marker mode and output filename settings See also Chapter 3 7 2 3 File Concept on page 194 Consider also the following remote control commands To define the configuration file inf_mswv used by the calculation of the output file SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CREate SOUR...

Page 204: ...ntries in the Segment Table Create and Load Creates a multi segment waveform and loads it in the ARB generator The R S SMBV100B stores the multi carrier waveform as file with filename as speci fied with parameter Output file Depending on the configuration of the multi carrier waveform calculation takes some time Use the Abort function to interrupt the calculation Remote command To define the confi...

Page 205: ... segments is retrieved from the tags of the corre sponding waveform files Segment Indication of segment index Within the manual and remote control configuration this segment index indicates the segment explicitly Tip Use the segment index for example to define the subsequent sequence to be output in Next Segment Mode Next Segment or Next Segment Seamless Waveform Indication of the waveform filenam...

Page 206: ...n Rearranges the segments i e moves the selected segment up and down Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend on page 760 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure DELete on page 760 Blank Segment Comprises the settings of a blank segment A blank segment is a zero signal with defined clock rate and number of samples Clock Rate Selects the clock rate of the blank segm...

Page 207: ... selected multi segment waveform file Settings Level 205 Clock 206 User Clock Rate 206 Segment Marker 206 Sequence Restart 206 Segment Restart 207 Level Defines the way the instrument determines the output level of each of the multiple waveforms Unchanged Concerning the level settings the segments are output exactly as defined in the individual files The Level display applies only to the segment w...

Page 208: ...too Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk MODE on page 759 User Clock Rate Defines the sample rate used for multi segment waveform output if Clock Mode User is selected Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk on page 759 Segment Marker Defines the way the marker information within the separate segments is processed see also Chapter 3 7 2 4 Impact of ...

Page 209: ...er 1 2 3 Generates a restart marker signal at the beginning of each segment The segment begin is defined by the low high slope of the marker sig nal which applies for switching between two segments and if there is a segment replay Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer ESEGment on page 757 3 7 3 4 Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Multi...

Page 210: ...no information 9 Use the Append Delete and Up Down functions to configure the order the seg ments are processed The user interface shows the configured play list in form of a Sequencing Graphic Refer to Sequencing Play List Settings on page 210 for description of the provi ded settings 10 Select ARB Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing General Save to store the play list Generating Multi Segment Wave...

Page 211: ...g Waveform 209 New Load Sequencing List Accesses the standard Select Sequencing List function to define the name of the new play list file or select of an existing one Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQuence SELect on page 756 Save List Save List As Saves the current entries of the table in a play list file Play list files have the file exten sion wvs The default filename of the pl...

Page 212: ... Graphic 211 Sequencing Play List The Sequencing Play List table defines the sequence order the waveform file seg ments are processed and how many times each of them is repeated Id Indicates the row number State Enables disables the selected row Only active segments are pro cessed Segment Indicates the segment index The sequencing list file carries information only about the segment index the corr...

Page 213: ...e signal output is stopped until a signal restart like a retrigger signal is received A restart signal causes a complete restart of the sequencing play list Endless The current segment is replayed until a signal restart like a retrigger signal is received and the complete sequencing play list is restarted Only active segments are considered Goto Id Determines the row number of the segment to be pr...

Page 214: ...ises the settings necessary to adjust the trigger for switching between the segments of a multi segment waveform The parameters displayed depend on the selected trigger source Settings Current Segment Current Segment Index 212 Segment 213 Next Segment Mode 213 Next Segment Source 214 Level Mode 214 Execute Next Segment 214 Sequencing List 214 Trigger Example 215 Current Segment Current Segment Ind...

Page 215: ... and triggering the whole multi segment sequence is set with the parameters in the ARB Trigger tab The segment currently being output is displayed at Current Segment The Trigger Example graph displays schematically the waveform output depending on the activa ted trigger and the next segment settings For background information refer to Chapter 3 7 2 5 Impact of the Trigger Settings and Next Segment...

Page 216: ...r event for switching to the next segment is input as config ured on one of the User x connectors See Chapter 10 2 Configuring the Global Connectors on page 515 Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT SOURce on page 755 Level Mode Sets how the instrument levels the individual segments in a multi segment signal The parameter is important if waveforms with different crest factors are use...

Page 217: ...ment wave form configuration together with the corresponding user interface dialogs and if appli cable the corresponding file extensions Perform the necessary settings enable the signal generation and provide trigger signal Figure 3 27 Basic workflow for generation of multi segment waveforms Generating a multi segment waveform file basic workflow 1 In the ARB Create Multi Segment General dialog se...

Page 218: ...nt test signals it may be necessary to switch dynami cally and flexibly between any of the test signals for instance depending on the out come of the previous test The following settings enable flexible dynamic switch over between the segments in a multi segment waveform We assume that a multi segment sequence composed of 4 segments Seg 0 Seg 1 Seg 2 and Seg 3 is created and loaded in the ARB see ...

Page 219: ...al computer the following settings enable switching times of approx 20 ms for segments with the same sample rate and approx 200 ms for segments with different sample rates ARB Trigger In MSW Next Segment Mode Next Segment ARB Trigger In Trigger Mode Auto ARB Trigger In Trigger Source Internal To generate a multi segment signal without signal interruptions Testing receivers requires a continuous ou...

Page 220: ...nding connectors are configured The following settings enable switching times of approx 5 us and the test signals are scrolled through with the aid of an external trigger signal 1 Select ARB Trigger In MSW Next Segment Mode Next Segment 2 Select ARB Trigger In MSW Next Segment Source External NEXT 3 Do not change the displayed segment index parameter ARB Trigger In MSW Segment 4 Enable ARB Trigger...

Page 221: ...t is switched on The following settings show an example of how to configure this segment output order with the help of the ARB sequencing function 1 In the ARB Multi Segment dialog load the previously created list and execute Create and Load 2 Select ARB Multi Segment General Sequencing List The Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing dialog opens A new play list is cre ated and assigned to the current ...

Page 222: ...and inserted into the multi segment waveform 1 Select ARB Marker Marker Mode Marker 1 Marker2 Unchanged to enable taking over of the marker signals defined inside the multi segment sequence If necessary adjust the marker delay settings 2 Select the Block Diagram Trigger Marker Clock and map the Logical Signals Marker 1 Marker 2 to the desired connectors Global Connectors User x Direction Output an...

Page 223: ...rs Retrigger Output starts at once and the segment is generated continuously a trigger event causes a restart If the segment is changed in Segment output of the current segment is stopped and the new segment is output immediately following a system imposed signal gap Armed_Retrigger Output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated continu ously Further trigger events cause...

Page 224: ...f the segment index is changed in Segment output of the current segment is stopped and the new segment is output immediately following a system imposed signal gap The subsequent trigger event after the last segment causes the first segment to be output again Armed_Auto Output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated continu ously Further trigger events are ignored Each ne...

Page 225: ...rigger Mode Description Armed_Auto Output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated continu ously Each trigger event re starts the segment each next segment trigger event switches over to outputting the subsequent segment once the output of the current segment has been completed If the segment is changed in Segment signal output is stopped and the new seg ment is not outpu...

Page 226: ...played by the ARB The R S SMBV100B stores the created multi carrier waveform file under user definable name as with the single carrier waveforms the used file extension is wv The instru ment appends additional information to the header of the composed waveform file When the created waveform is loaded the graphical interface displays information on clock rate number of samples and creation day Gene...

Page 227: ...carrier closest to the center RF frequency shows no phase jump It is assumed that the carrier is unmodulated For odd number of carriers RoundedCarrierSpacing 1 OutputSignalDuration round CarrierSpac ing OutputSignalDuration For even number of carriers RoundedCarrierSpacing 2 OutputSignalDuration round 0 5 CarrierSpac ing OutputSignalDuration The R S SMBV100B provides the parameter Mode for this pu...

Page 228: ...he carrier distribu tion around the center frequency and adjusting some parameters for improving the signal characteristics The dialog is divided into several tabs In each case the current setting is dis played in the tab name The tab Carrier Table enables the selection of the wave form files to be processed Use the Carrier Graph to visualize the configured sig nal The remote commands required to ...

Page 229: ... Clipping 229 Target Crest Factor 229 Filter Cutoff Frequency 229 Signal Period Mode 229 Signal Period 230 Power Reference 230 Output Settings 231 Output File 232 Clock Rate 232 File Size 232 Create Create and Load 232 Set to Default Calls the default settings Parameter Value Number of Carriers 1 Carrier Spacing 0 MHz Crest Factor Mode Off Signal Period Mode Longest file wins Generating Multi Carr...

Page 230: ...selected number of carriers and the carrier spacing Arbitrary Carrier Frequency Enables the specification of the carrier frequency of each carrier indi vidually Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier MODE on page 763 Number of Carriers Sets the number of carriers for the multi carrier waveform By default the multi carrier table lists one carrier A maximum of 512 carriers can be con...

Page 231: ...Chapter 3 8 2 2 Optimizing the Crest Factor on page 225 Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping STATe on page 765 Target Crest Factor Sets the value of the target crest factor if baseband clipping is enabled A Target Crest Factor above the crest factor of the unclipped multicarrier signal has no effect For more information refer to Chapter 3 8 2 2 Optimizing the Crest Factor on pag...

Page 232: ...iles are repeated periodically and only the first part of longer I Q files is used Least Common Multiple The output file duration is the least common multiple of all input file durations Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME MODE on page 766 Signal Period Sets the signal period in Signal Duration Mode User Shorter I Q files are repeated periodically and only the first part of longer ...

Page 233: ... the first carrier signal Example Multi carrier signal composed of waveforms with dif ferent crest factor A multi carrier signal is composed from two waveform files with the following characteristics 3GPP FDD signals with the same Sample Rate but different Crest Factors Peak 0 dBFS Carrier Gain 0 dB The Peak values of the carrier signals are equal the RMS values are different Remote command SOURce...

Page 234: ...e of the leftmost or rightmost carriers Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLOCk on page 767 File Size Output Settings Displays the resulting number of samples of the multi carrier waveform Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SAMPles on page 764 Create Create and Load Creates a multi carrier waveform defined by the multi carrier table and general setting entries If you start...

Page 235: ... Table Assistant The settings of all available carriers are displayed in table form Previously applied assistant settings can be further refined The number of lines corresponds to the number of carriers The phase deg settings are only valid if optimization of the crest factor is disabled Crest Factor Mode Off Use the Carrier Graph tab to visualize the selected multi carrier configuration Settings ...

Page 236: ...frequency can only be set in Arbitrary Carrier frequency mode For Equidistant Carrier Spacing the carrier spacing is determined automatically Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch FREQuency on page 768 Gain Sets the gain of a carrier Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch POWer on page 768 Phase Sets the starting phase of a carrier Remote command SOURce hw BB...

Page 237: ...ble tab Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch CONFlict on page 769 3 8 3 3 Carrier Table Assistant Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Multi Carrier 2 Select ARB Multi Carrier Carrier Table Carrier Table Assistant The Carrier Table Assistant dialog enables the configuration of a selectable sub set of carrier The provided settings are an optional way to create a multi carrier s...

Page 238: ...er Start Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STARt on page 770 Gain Step Sets the step width that is used to increment the gain The resulting carrier gain in the carrier table equals Gain Gain Start n Gain Step Where n is a value between 0 and Carrier Stop Carrier Start Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STEP on page 770 Phase Start Sets...

Page 239: ...arrier Start Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier DELay STEP on page 771 Input Waveform File Accesses the standard File Select function for selecting the input file The input file contains the I Q signal to be modulated ontoall carriers of the selected carrier range Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier FILE on page 772 Apply Assistant Settings Transfer...

Page 240: ...g general steps 1 To configure the general settings select Baseband ARB General 2 To configure the carrier table select ARB Multi Carrier Carrier Table 3 To enter the filename of the multi carrier waveform select ARB Multi Carrier Output File 4 To save and load multi carrier waveform select ARB Multi Carrier Create or Create and Load To generate a multicarrier signal for standard transmitter test ...

Page 241: ...Perform the following a In the General dialog select Number of Carriers 4 and Carrier Spacing 5 MHz b To load the generated waveform file to all 4 carriers select Carrier Table Carrier Table Assistant Select Carrier Start 0 and Carrier Stop 3 c To load the generated waveform file to all 4 carriers select ARB Multi Carrier Table Input Waveform File Navigate to the generated waveform file 3gpp_1_16 ...

Page 242: ...tings Output File and enter the name of the output file for example 4x5MHz_3gpp_1_16 8 To trigger signal calculation and to load the waveform in the ARB generator select ARB Multi Carrier General Create Create and Load function 9 Select ARB General Load Waveform Confirm that the generated multi carrier waveform is used 10 Select ARB State On to enable the ARB generator Generating Multi Carrier Sig...

Page 243: ... of the carriers are user definable The provided settings allow individual configuration of each carrier and the joint configuration of subset of carriers Automatic start phase setting is provided to minimize the crest factor The multi carrier CW signals are not generated in realtime but rather computed in arbi trary waveform mode Changes in the carrier settings are not considered until the instru...

Page 244: ...Clock Frequency 243 Optimize Crest Factor Mode 243 Desired Crest Factor 244 State Enables disables the Multi Carrier CW Switching on this option turns off all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes in the corresponding signal path Multi carrier CW signals are computed in arbitrary waveform mode To adopt the changes in the settings of individual carriers select Accept This selecti...

Page 245: ...f table rows new rows are appended to the table Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier COUNt on page 784 Carrier Spacing Sets the spacing between carriers for the multi carrier CW signal The carriers are arranged symmetrically around the HF carrier Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier SPACing on page 784 Bandwidth Indicates the resulting occupied signal bandwidth calculated from the selected...

Page 246: ... to a desired value for all carrier config urations The optimization time depends on the number of carriers and the desired crest factor Computation time increases only when the num ber of carriers exceeds 256 and the crest factor is below 4 dB The desired value can be entered in Desired Crest Factor Note Optimization can be canceled at any time and the current value being displayed at that moment...

Page 247: ... Assistant Defines the start stop index of the carrier range to which the following settings are intended to apply Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt on page 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STOP on page 790 Carrier State Table Setup Assistant Switches the carriers in the carrier range on off Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STATe on page 790 Power Start Table Setup...

Page 248: ...g into the Carrier Table Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier EXECute on page 790 Carrier Table A table with settings for the configuration of the individual carriers The multi carrier CW signal is only computed when the Accept function is triggered Whenever the carrier table contains settings that have not yet been adopted with the Accept function the background is yellow Note The phase ...

Page 249: ...Graph The Carrier Graph tab is a graphical representation of the current carrier configura tion The carriers are on the X axis and the colored bars represent those carriers which are in the active state Power is on the Y axis and the height of the bars corresponds to the chosen power of each individual carrier 3 9 3 4 Trigger Marker and Clock Setting These tabs provide standard settings For detail...

Page 250: ...tting as required Select Multi Carrier Continuous Wave State ON 5 Enable the signal output RF ON 6 On the connected signal analyzer perform the required measurement tasks Mea sure the frequency response at the outputs of the DUT To generate a single sideband test signal for testing the image rejection If a single sideband test signal for testing the image rejection capabilities of DUT is required ...

Page 251: ...d signal analyzer perform the required measurement tasks Mea sure the frequency response at the outputs of the DUT 3 9 5 References Table 3 21 MCCW default values Parameter Value State Not affected by Set to Default Carrier Setup Number of Carriers 64 Carrier Spacing 10 kHz Optimize Crest Factor Chirp Desired Crest Factor 3 dB Trigger Mode Auto Source Internal Ext Delay 0 Ext Inhibit 0 Marker Chan...

Page 252: ...n the output of the corresponding block Baseband or BB Input The shifting of the central frequency of the baseband signal is one of the tasks of the resampler 3 10 1 1 Impact of the Frequency Offset For some applications it is helpful to shift the baseband signal with a user defined baseband frequency offset to a different center frequency so that the signal character istics are improved The provi...

Page 253: ...es the setting range of the frequency offset Figure 3 29 Setting range of frequency offset Example Calculating the maximum frequency offset This example uses the following signal Standard 3GPP FDD Chip Rate 3 84 Mcps Filter Type Root Cosine Roll Off Factor 0 22 The complex useful bandwidth of filtered signal is calculated as follows see Impact of the Filter Parameters on page 106 fuse 1 Roll Off F...

Page 254: ...baseband sig nals A phase offset rotates each point of an I Q constellation diagram by the specified phase offset Figure 3 30 Effect of a Phase Offset of 45 degree angle on the I Q constellation diagram How to observe the effect Use the built in real time graphical display System Configuration Graphics Con stellation and observe that the points on the I Q constellation diagram are turning counterc...

Page 255: ...eristics by Shifting the Wanted Baseband Signal on page 253 Remote command SOURce hw BB FOFFset on page 710 SOURce hw BBIN FOFFset on page 710 Phase Offset Enters the phase offset for the baseband signal see Chapter 3 10 1 2 Impact of the Phase Offset on page 252 The phase offset affects the signal on the Baseband block output Use this parameter for example to change the start phase of the baseban...

Page 256: ...V100B generates a baseband signal A spectrum analyzer is connected to the R S SMBV100B the analyzed is config ured and measures the required signal characteristics To shift the generated baseband signal Select Baseband Baseband Offsets Frequency Offset and apply an offset to the generated baseband signal To verify the characteristics of the generated signal and to observe the effect of applied fre...

Page 257: ... 1 Required Options The equipment layout for generating an AWGN signal includes Base unit Option Noise Generator R S SMBVB K62 per signal path 4 1 2 About the AWGN Generator Provided the required options are installed the R S SMBV100B allows you to super impose noise on the generated signal The built in internal noise generator generates an AWGN signal Additive White Gaussian Noise with selectable...

Page 258: ...cy offset and car rier to interferer C I power ratio is added to the baseband signal Signal and noise parameters The Figure 4 2 illustrates the relation between the signal and noise parameters Figure 4 2 Graphical representation of the relation between system bandwidth and noise bandwidth Minimum Noise System BW 2 System BW Occupied BW The system bandwidth is a measure for the transmitted RF bandw...

Page 259: ...lated respectively The noise signal is not generated arbitrarily for a particular bandwidth but instead it is generated in steps Noise therefore also occurs outside the set system bandwidth which means that the total measurable noise power usually exceeds the displayed value Noise Power For a correct measurement of the noise power within the system bandwidth we recom mend that you perform channel ...

Page 260: ...es however for example the 3GPP Base Station Tests TS 25 141 specify the E N settings that apply to channel coded data or block segments Set the parameter Bit Rate to the required value e g the bit rate before or after chan nel coding Understanding the displayed information The following example explains the impact of the AWGN settings on the signal and noise parameters See Figure 4 3 for an examp...

Page 261: ...0 MHz Use the built in graphical signal monitoring function of the instrument to display the sig nal characteristics in real time see To observe the effect of enabled additive noise AWGN on page 425 Application fields Typically the noise generator is required for the following tests In receiver sensibility tests with predefined SNR of the receiver see To configure the AWGN for receiver sensibility...

Page 262: ...260 Mode 260 System Bandwidth 261 Minimum Noise System Bandwidth Ratio 261 Target CW Frequency Offset 261 State Activates deactivates the generation of an AWGN signal The interferer AWGN or CW interferer depending on the selected mode is generated after the generator is activa ted Remote command SOURce hw AWGN STATe on page 797 Mode Selects the mode for generating the interfering signal Additive N...

Page 263: ...ure 4 2 Remote command SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth on page 798 Minimum Noise System Bandwidth Ratio For Additive Noise and Noise Only modes sets the ratio of minimum noise band width to system bandwidth as required by some standards Noise Bandwidth System BW x Minimum Noise System BW Ratio The parameter Noise Bandwidth displays the resulting noise bandwidth Because the noise power density is a constant ...

Page 264: ... Signal Power 264 Noise Power System Bandwidth Interferer Power 265 Noise Power Total Bandwidth 266 Carrier Noise Power Signal Noise Power System Bandwidth Carrier Interferer Power Signal Interferer Power 266 Carrier Noise PEP Signal Noise PEP Total Bandwidth Carrier Interferer PEP Signal Interferer PEP 266 Noise Bandwidth 266 Resulting CW Frequency Offset 266 Show Powers for Output Sets the outpu...

Page 265: ...accordingly Some test cases however for example the 3GPP Base Station Tests TS 25 141 specify explicitly the noise power These test cases require that the noise power is permanently set as a function of the base station power class whereas the carrier power is variable Remote command SOURce hw AWGN POWer RMODe on page 799 Bit Rate In Additive Noise mode indicates the bit rate used for converting C...

Page 266: ...constant The power of the noise signal is derived from the selected Eb N0 and displayed with the parameter Noise Power in the units of the useful signal The power of the useful signal is displayed with the parameter Carrier Power This indication corresponds to the Level value in the Status bar The power of the output signal is displayed as Carrier Noise Power See also Figure 4 3 Remote command SOU...

Page 267: ...value The carrier power is selected with Carrier Power respectively the signal power is displayed by Signal Power CW Interferer mode Reference Mode Noise Sets the power of the interfering signal The power of the carrier is derived from the entered C I value Reference Mode Carrier Displays the power of the interfering signal The power of the interfering signal is derived from the entered C N or S N...

Page 268: ...e 801 Carrier Noise PEP Signal Noise PEP Total Bandwidth Carrier Interferer PEP Signal Interferer PEP In Additive Noise and CW Interferer mode displays the peak envelope power PEP of the overall signal comprised of noise signal plus useful signal The output selected with the parameter Show Powers for Output determines The name of this parameter The units the overall power is measured in dBm or dB ...

Page 269: ...tion UE1 FRC FRC State On and FRC TS 36 141 A2 3 EUTRA LTE State On Status bar Frequency 1 95 GHz and Level 69 9 dBm RF State On To configure the AWGN for receiver sensibility tests with predefined SNR of the receiver We assume that an AWGN interfering signal with the following characteristics is required The mean power of the interfering signal is 82 5 dBm BW and C N 12 6 dB 1 Select AWGN and ena...

Page 270: ... and the CW signal 10 MHz below it Signals with equal or sim ilar RF levels and at frequencies spaced within the max RF bandwidth can be gener ated by the same path To configure the instrument 1 Enable the required LTE signal a Select EUTRA LTE General Uplink Setting Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz and EUTRA LTE State On b Select Status bar Frequency 1 96 GHz and Level 52 dBm 2 Enable the required interfe...

Page 271: ...ter conditions receiver tests To compensate the faults of the I Q demodulator in the receiver See Chapter 4 2 4 How to Optimize the Carrier Leakage and Sidebands Suppres sion on page 275 The R S SMBV100B offers functions to impair the internally generated signal or the externally fed analog I Q signal linearly Each generated I Q stream can be impaired digitally Analog impairments can be added to t...

Page 272: ...of a positive and negative gain imbalance is shown on Fig ure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Negative gain imbalance left and positive gain imbalance right in the I Q constellation diagram 4 2 2 2 I and Q Offset An I offset adds a constant value to all I amplitudes leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q offset has the opposite effect A combination of I and Q values results in an I Q offset which is due to carrier...

Page 273: ...eater than 90 degrees The effect of a positive quadrature offset in the I Q con stellation diagram is shown on Figure 4 7 Figure 4 7 Positive quadrature offset in the I Q constellation diagram 4 2 3 Analog and Digital Impairments Settings You can add digital impairments to each internal generated I Q stream and analog impairments to internal generated or external supplied analog I Q signals See al...

Page 274: ...Select I Q Mod Digital Impairments Select I Q Analog Digital Impairments Select I Q Digital Digital Impairments The dialog covers the settings for I Q impairment like carrier leakage imbalance offset and delay The parameters Skew and IQ Delay are enabled in the I Q Modulator or I Q Analog Digital Impairments dialog The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12 1...

Page 275: ...ut ch STATe on page 806 I Q Offset Sets a carrier offset in percent of the amplitudes scaled to the peak envelope power PEP for the I and or Q signal component An ideal I Q modulator suppresses the car rier offset completely offset 0 percent For more information see Chapter 4 2 2 2 I and Q Offset on page 270 To optimize the carrier leakage suppression on page 275 Remote command For analog impairme...

Page 276: ... SOURce hw IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe on page 805 For digital impairments SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch QUADrature ANGLe on page 805 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch QUADrature ANGLe on page 805 Skew In the I Q Modulator or I Q Analog Digital Impairments dialog sets a delay between the Q vector and the I vector of the corresponding stream Remote command SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch SKEW on pa...

Page 277: ...band signal perform the following iterative steps 1 In the block diagram select I Q Mod I Q Digital Impairments 2 Set the values of the parameters Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Offset to adjust the relative amplitude and phase relationship of the baseband signal 3 Select State On 4 On a connected signal analyzer monitor the power spectrum 5 Vary the values of the parameters Gain Imbalance and Quad...

Page 278: ...ortion Digital predistortion DPD is one of the methods used to improve the efficiency of RF power amplifiers In the R S SMBV100B the generated digital signal can be deliber ately AM AM and AM PM predistorted See user manual R S SMBVB K540 R S SMBVB K541 Envelope Tracking and AM AM AM PM Predistortion Applying Digital Predistortion ...

Page 279: ...rately processed and an external analog I Q signal The maximum available RF bandwidth of externally applied wideband analog signal is higher than the bandwidths of the internal or external digital signal For exact values refer to the instrument specification data sheet Analog I Q input signals are directly applied to the analog I Q modulation circuit and are not routed through the baseband section...

Page 280: ...nalog wideband input signal 2 To access the dialog box for configuring the I Q modulator settings select I Q Mod I Q Settings I Q Modulator The dialog comprises the I Q modulator settings the optimized settings for wide band modulation and settings for enabling the analog and or digital impairments The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 8 SOURce IQ Su...

Page 281: ...n I Q modulation can however be deactivated later e g if the relevant signal is the baseband signal and it is directly routed to the I Q outputs Remote command SOURce hw IQ STATe on page 831 Source Selects the input signal for the I Q modulator Refer to Table 5 1 for an overview of the possible input signals and the connectors they are supplied at Internal Baseband Selects the internal baseband si...

Page 282: ...pi fct See also Description CDMA2000 incl EV DV Digital Standard for R S SMBV100B Description 1xEV DO Rev A Rev B Digital Standard for R S SMBV100B Off I Q control is normal On The modulation sidebands are inverted by swapping the I and Q sig nals the Q part of the signal is inverted The generated baseband signal is according to CDMA200 and 1xEV DO standards An I Q modulator defined according to t...

Page 283: ...n for I Q skew and frequency response correction This mode generates flat signal but requires longer setting time and leads to signal interruption Note Do not use the mode I Q Modulator Optimization Mode High Quality in combination with the modes RF Level Setting Charac teristics Uninterrupted Strictly Monotone The high quality I Q optimization leads to RF signal interruption The requirements of t...

Page 284: ...R Remote command For analog I Q signal SOURce hw IQ GAIN on page 831 For digital I Q signal SOURce hw BB IQGain on page 831 5 4 Frequency Response Settings Access In the block diagram select I Q Mod Frequency Response The dialog opens and shows the frequency response correction related settings The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 5 3 Frequency Resp...

Page 285: ... not be fulfilled Remote command SOURce hw BB IMPairment OPTimization MODE on page 806 Optimization Bandwidth For Optimization Mode High Quality High Quality Table defines how the signal bandwidth on that frequency response is compensated is selected Auto Signal bandwidth is determined automatically it corresponds to the bandwidth of the baseband signal Manual Signal bandwidth is set with the para...

Page 286: ...band signal This mode generates flat signal but requires longer settling time and leads to signal interruption 2 Select Optimization Mode High Quality Note Do not use the mode I Q Modulator Optimization Mode High Quality in combi nation with the modes RF Level Setting Characteristics Uninterrupted Strictly Monotone The high quality I Q optimization leads to RF signal interruption The requirements ...

Page 287: ...s achieved To trigger the internal correction routine of the I Q modulator System error correction of the I Q modulator permits precise and repeatable measure ments If a temperature fluctuation of several degrees occurs trigger the correction routine using the following Select I Q Mod I Q Modulator Adjust I Q Modulator Current Frequency To generate a wideband modulation signal 1 In the block diagr...

Page 288: ...ion values for user correction lists Signal modes and characteristics The R S SMBV100B generates unmodulated or analog modulated RF signals You can output the signal in fixed mode or as a signal having periodically varying frequen cies or amplitudes Signal modes for RF signal generation Unmodulated signal Generates an unmodulated continuous wave CW of constant frequency and amplitude For informati...

Page 289: ... diagram select the block RF RF 2 Select the required function form the list The RF block comprises all functions and settings concerning the RF signal These include the RF frequency and level settings with all enhanced functions for improv ing the signal characteristics the analog modulations list and sweep mode set tings as well as connector assignments and measurement functions of the RF sig na...

Page 290: ...y Frequency Frequency RF RF Level Level Level RF RF Frequency Phase Block diagram underlined label RF Frequency Frequency Fre quency etc On the front panel press the Freq or the Level key Current frequency and level values are indicated on the Status bar so that you can see them at a glance Values displayed in the status bar and in the Frequency Level dialogs can deviate form each other See RF fre...

Page 291: ...cy and Level display vs frequency and level at the RF output fRF LevelRF Frequency and level Status bar Frequency and Level at the output of the downstream instrument see also Calculation of fRF and LevelRF fRF Out LevelRF Out Frequency and level at the output connector RF RF RF Frequency Frequency and RF RF Level Amplitude n f Multiplication factor RF RF Frequency Multiplier Δf Frequency offset R...

Page 292: ... Frequency 290 Offset 291 Multiplier 291 User Variation 291 Variation Active 291 Variation Step 291 Frequency Sets the RF frequency This frequency is output at the RF connector It does not consider an Offset or multipli cation factor Multiplier See RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument on page 288 Note Suppressed values in the status bar For security concerns or certain opera...

Page 293: ...resents the multiplication factor of a downstream instrument like for example a multiplier The Frequency value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency as it is at the output of the downstream instrument The frequency at the R S SMBV100B RF output is not changed See RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument on page 288 Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MULTiplier o...

Page 294: ...an configure the offset free level the level limit and the step width for varying the level with the rotary knob 2 Select User Variation to set the step width to be used when setting the RF level using the rotary knob The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 15 SOURce POWer Subsystem on page 867 RF Level Settings ...

Page 295: ...ation Frequency Annotation Amplitude The display is disabled when List mode is running see Chapter 6 10 Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode on page 310 Remote command SOURce hw POWer POWer on page 872 Note The SCPI command SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display This means the level containing offset Limit Sets an upper limit for the RF output power Yo...

Page 296: ...nd the Levelrms as follows LevelPEP RF output LevelPEP Digital Attenuation Levelrms RF output Levelrms Digital Attenuation The level range changes accordingly Note The digital attenuation has no effect on the RF output level when you work in CW mode or with externally applied I Q signals i e with unmodulated signals If the digital attenuation effects the RF level the R S SMBV100B indicates the res...

Page 297: ...onic switches which might affect the monotonicity are fixed The operation mode is useful for applications using level searching algorithms which rely on a strictly monotonous behavior Constant VSWR Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF output connector due to changed level settings User Indicates that a setting has been modified in the expert mode The expert mode is a protected function...

Page 298: ... Variation Defines and activates a user defined step width for varying the RF frequency or RF level with the rotary knob If disabled the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position Variation Active User Variation Activates the set user defined step width Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency STEP MODE on page 828 SOURce hw POWer STEP MODE on page 873 Variation Step User Variation Se...

Page 299: ...ase of the RF signal The current phase of the signal is used as the reference Note Achieving long term stable phase locked coupling We recommend that you use the LO coupling feature if you try to synchronize the output signal with the phase of a second signal generator for example See Chapter 6 9 Local Oscillator Coupling on page 305 Remote command SOURce hw PHASe on page 866 Reset Delta Phase Dis...

Page 300: ...or RST and the Save Recall function They are reset only by factory preset The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 16 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem on page 876 6 8 1 Required Options R S SMBV100B base unit equipped with the following options Reference oscillator R S SMBVB B1 1 GHz reference R S SMBVB B3 For more information see data sheet 6 8 2 Using the...

Page 301: ...MHz Figure 6 2 Synchronizing instruments using the internal 10 MHz reference signal of the R S SMBV100B Ref In Ref Out Connectors Sharing the 1 GHz reference frequency to obtain phase coherent signals Compared to 10 MHz a 1 GHz reference signal significantly improves the achievable phase stability between two signal sources Because the synchronization increases by a factor of 100 the relative phas...

Page 302: ...ence Frequency current external frequency Reference Output Input Signal loop through or specify the reference fre quency the synchronized instrument supports Set the synchronization bandwidth according to the requirements of the applica tion Deriving 10 MHz from the external reference frequency 10 MHz reference frequency can be derived from the following external reference sig nals 10 MHz from int...

Page 303: ...l Reference Frequency In the Reference Frequency tab you can select the signal source of the reference frequency and define the frequency of an external reference signal 2 Observe the information in the status bar of the block diagram The status bar indicates the current oscillator configuration The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 16 SOURce ROSCill...

Page 304: ...OSCillator SOURce on page 878 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument Deactivate RF Output if external reference is missing Turns off the RF output when the external reference signal is selected but no signal is supplied This function prevents that no improper RF signal due to the missing external refe...

Page 305: ... external signal with narrow bandwidth 1 Hz This setting is recommended if the phase noise of the external signal is worse than the phase noise of the internal OCXO Wide This mode is the recommended standard mode and for precise refer ence sources of high spectral purity Remote command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth on page 879 Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth Indicates the nominal synchr...

Page 306: ...l that is to be output as frequency reference for downstream instru ments Off Disables the reference signal output 10 MHz Derives a signal with 10 MHz frequency from the internal reference oscillator and forwards this signal to the output 1 GHz Option R S SMBVB B3 Outputs a 1 GHz signal Input Signal loop through Forwards the external reference frequency to the output directly Remote command SOURce...

Page 307: ...erence oscillator type and its factory calibra tion value Note The setting is not affected by an instrument preset Preset key or RST and the Save Recall function It is reset only by factory preset Remote command SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue on page 881 6 9 Local Oscillator Coupling The LO Coupling function allows a distribution of the local oscillator signal in a way that multiple RF s...

Page 308: ... MHz reference they are generating the same frequency but only from the long term perspective Having a closer look into the instantaneous differential phase delta phase of these two RF signals the follow ing are possible causes for instabilities Phase noise of the two synthesizers Weak coupling at 10 MHz and a long synthesis chain up to the RF domain Temperature differences which cause a change of...

Page 309: ... of the RF Frequency Phase Ext Reference dialog In external mode with active Out State the LO coupling mode is defined within an RF frequency range of 80 MHz to 6 GHz If you the set the RF frequency below 80 MHz the R S SMBV100B adjusts the frequency to the minimum value and displays a corre sponding message Internal Uses the internal signal External Uses an externally supplied signal Remote comma...

Page 310: ...onnectors are located on the rear panel To find out the exact position proceed as follows 1 In the block diagram select the T E P L V status indication field above the RF block 2 Select LO In Show 3 Observe the connectors s position on the Rear panel See also Chapter 10 2 4 RF Connectors Settings on page 519 To configure LO coupling with cascaded instruments to achieve phase coher ence The LO Coup...

Page 311: ...or example R S SMBV100B R S SGT100A or R S SMBV100A It receives the LO signal from the second instrument To configure the application proceed as follows 1 Connect the first signal generator Ref Out with LO In of the second instrument and similarly the LO Out of the second signal generator with LO In of the third 2 Configure Signal Generator 1 Select Freq 5 GHz a Select RF LO Coupling Mode Internal...

Page 312: ...l Current Frequency procedure of the previ ous instrument is completed Execute Adjust LO Level Current Frequency The signal generator automatically adjusts the internal LO signal level at the I Q modulator and LO Out connector All instruments generate the RF signals in phase as they use the same oscillator signal looped through all instruments Example Generating a beamformed signal with two one pa...

Page 313: ... Sweep mode is to determine the frequency response a DUT List mode The instrument generates a varying output signal based on a previously saved list with frequency amplitude and step width values While in sweep mode the fre quency or the level values change in list mode you can vary both parameters simultaneously The frequency and level values do not need to have ascending or descending order they...

Page 314: ...Sweep and List Modes In both operating modes List and Sweep triggering and signal generation follow the same principle The instrument generates the signal continuously that means trig gered automatically or in individual steps controlled manually by an internal or exter nal trigger signal The instrument expects the trigger signal at the Inst Trig connector If the dwell time in sweep or list mode i...

Page 315: ...r each mode see the cross reference tables See also the following programming examples on the sweep and list modes in remote control Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Example Setup an LF sweep on page 837 Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Auto mode Sweep List Figure 6 8 Auto mode Sweep List The instrument generates the signal continuously Trigg...

Page 316: ... FREQuency MODE AUTO List SOURce hw LIST MODE AUTO SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce AUTO Single Extern Single mode Sweep List Figure 6 9 Single Extern Single mode sweep list In single mode you can specify that the signal returns to the start value when a sweep cycle has been completed See The Retrace function on page 319 for details The instrument generates a single sweep cycle Trigger mode Manual A ...

Page 317: ...Extern Single Remote commands Rohde Schwarz proprietary and SCPI conform value name RF frequency sweep TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce SINGle BUS Single or TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce EXTernal EXTernal Extern Single SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO RF level sweep TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce SINGle BUS for Single or TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce EXTernal EXTernal for Extern Sin gle SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE AUTO...

Page 318: ...ignal generation with State Off Trigger sources The rotary knob at the front panel The Arrow keys at the front panel The corresponding remote control commands An externally applied trigger signal To step through the sweep frequencies or levels In manual mode Set the Current Frequency or Current Level values Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob In remote control mode Use the commands SOURce ...

Page 319: ...w SWEep POWer MODE STEP LF frequency sweep TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce SINGle BUS Step or TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce EXTernal EXTenal Extern Step SOURce hw LFOutput ch SWEep FREQuency MODE STEP List SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce SINGle Step or SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Extern Step SOURce hw LIST MODE STEP Extern Start Stop mode sweep Figure 6 11 Extern Start Stop mode sweep The instrum...

Page 320: ... control mode Extern Start Stop Remote commands Rohde Schwarz proprietary and SCPI conform value name RF frequency sweep TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce EAUTo SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO RF level sweep TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce EAUTo SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE AUTO LF frequency sweep TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce EAUTo SOURce hw LFOutput ch SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO Manual mode Sweep List The manual ...

Page 321: ...t SOURce hw LIST INDex Index The Retrace function Retrace is a function especially designed for Single sweep modes when the sweep signal follows a sawtooth shape Working in this mode the instrument performs a sin gle sweep cycle when a trigger event occurs The signal generation stops at the set end point stop frequency or stop level and waits for the next trigger event In this state the upper valu...

Page 322: ...ogs enables you to reset the sweep to its initial value and restart it Impact of changing the sweep mode during performance If you change the sweep mode during the execution the signal generator stops the sweep and starts with the next trigger event at the initial value 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode A sweep signal is a periodic signal that changes its frequency or level from a star...

Page 323: ...OP fCENTer fSTARt fSTOP 2 fSPAN fSTOP fSTARt Where fSTARt fCENTer fSPAN 2 fSTOP fCENTer fSPAN 2 Offset 0 A defined offset also affects the sweep range and the center frequency Therefore the set frequencies are only absolute values if the Offset 0 Offset 0 shifts the frequen cies with the offset value Sweep Range fSTARt fOFFSet to fSTOP fOFFSet fCENTer fCENTer fOFFSet fSPAN fSPAN fOFFSet The value ...

Page 324: ...2 f1 1 step_log 100 If f2 fSTOP then f2 fSTOP With Shape Triangle the frequency values on the slope from fSTOP to fSTARt are the same as on the slope from fSTARt to fSTOP If you specify the number of steps within the sweep range the step size is adjusted according to the following correlation For linear sweeps and fSTARt fSTOP POINtsfrequency fSTARt fSTOP step_lin 1 fSPAN step_lin 1 For logarithmi...

Page 325: ...lue 2 Stop value 3 Step size The current frequency or level of an RF frequency level or LF frequency sweep is determined by the shape e g sawtooth or triangle and the spacing linear or logarith mic and the step size 6 10 3 About List Mode The list mode is used to generate the RF signal based on a set of predefined fre quency and amplitude value pairs with individual step times You can define the v...

Page 326: ...to exchange configuration between instru ments or to modify the file content with an external program and reload them again Externally Create a list file as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel with a Notepad or a similar tool and save it with the predefined extension Transfer the file to and load it into the instrument Dwell time mode You can choose whether you want to use different dwell times or a f...

Page 327: ...d is processed the instrument automatically calcu lates the necessary hardware settings It can be performed during list processing but delays the first cycle especially with short dwell times With long dwell times you can perform this calculation while the list is being pro cessed the entered dwell times are observed With short dwell times calculation of the hardware settings increases the dwell t...

Page 328: ...his section lists the settings of all available sweep modes Access 1 Select RF Sweep List RF Frequency Sweep 2 Select RF Sweep List RF Level Sweep 3 Select RF Sweep List LF Frequency Sweep The sweep modes use the similar parameters to be configured Thus the descrip tion comprises the settings of the three dialogs RF Frequency Sweep RF Level Sweep and LF Frequency Sweep If parameters relate to only...

Page 329: ...weeps or lists and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MODE on page 824 State RF level sweep Activates RF level sweep signal generation Note Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw POWer MODE on page 872 State LF frequency sweep Status of the LF frequency sweep signal You find this parameter in two dialogs LF Frequency Sweep turns on of...

Page 330: ...age 312 Auto Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal directly after acti vating the sweep mode The sweep steps are performed automatically controlled by the dwell time Single Extern Single Generates a single sweep cycle after a trigger event The sweep steps within the cycle are performed automatically con trolled by the dwell time If one cycle is completed the instrument waits for the next...

Page 331: ...applied Remote command SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RETRace on page 887 SOURce hw SWEep POWer RETRace on page 887 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency RETRace on page 848 Shape Selects the waveform shape of the sweep signal Sawtooth The sweep runs from start to stop frequency The subsequent sweep starts at the start value i e the shape of the sweep sequence resem bles a sawtooth Figure 6 16 Sweep signa...

Page 332: ...s with which the current frequency at each step is increased or decreased Enter the step size with the parameter Step Linear Step Logarithmic Linear Takes the frequency value entered as absolute value in Hz Logarithmic Takes the value entered as a logarithmic value i e as a constant fraction of the current frequency in Remote command SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SPACing on page 886 SOURce hw LFOutput...

Page 333: ...EQuency EXECute on page 887 SOURce hw SWEep POWer EXECute on page 887 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute on page 847 TRIGger hw SWEep IMMediate on page 924 TRIGger hw FSWeep IMMediate on page 924 TRIGger hw PSWeep IMMediate on page 924 TRIGger hw LFFSweep IMMediate on page 924 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear p...

Page 334: ...nter Frequency In RF Frequency Sweep mode sets the RF center frequency See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency CENTer on page 827 Span In RF Frequency Sweep mode sets the span of the frequency sweep range See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency SPAN on page 827 Spacing ...

Page 335: ...he current Spacing you can enter either an absolute or logarithmic step width See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Step Linear The step width is a constant value in Hz Step Logarithmic The step width is determined logarithmically in i e as a constant fraction of the current frequency Remote command SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear on page 888 SOURce hw SWEep F...

Page 336: ...e Set the step size with the parameter Step Remote command n a Step Applies to RF Level Sweep mode Sets the step width for the RF level sweep steps logarithmically in dB Remote command SOURce hw SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic on page 885 Use Digital Attenuation Activates digital attenuation during RF level sweep Setting Characteristics Selects additional quality characteristics to optimize the behav...

Page 337: ...notonicity are fixed The operation mode is useful for applications using level searching algorithms which rely on a strictly monotonous behavior Constant VSWR Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF output connector due to changed level settings User Indicates that a setting has been modified in the expert mode The expert mode is a protected function that requires protection level 2 passw...

Page 338: ...r and dwell time modes for list processing and activate signal generation Settings State 336 Current Index 336 Mode 337 Dwell Time Mode 337 Global Dwell Time 337 Trigger Slope 337 Show Connector 338 Reset 338 Execute Single 338 State Activates the list mode and processes the currently selected list Note Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw FRE...

Page 339: ...eted the instrument waits for the next trig ger event Step Extern Step Generates the signal by processing the frequency level value pairs of the list step by step manually triggered Remote command SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce on page 857 SOURce hw LIST MODE on page 856 Dwell Time Mode Selects either variable dwell times or a fixed dwell time to perform signal generation in list mode Global Uses t...

Page 340: ...nd SOURce hw LIST RESet on page 860 Execute Single Manually starts list processing in Single mode Remote command SOURce hw LIST TRIGger EXECute on page 857 6 10 6 2 List Mode Data Settings Access 1 Select RF Sweep List List mode 2 Select List Mode Data This dialog contains the parameters required for creating and editing lists activat ing the learning function and selecting the list processing mod...

Page 341: ...ion also in standard file select dialog accessed via List Mode Data List Range from to Defines an index range in the current list by setting the start and stop index The instrument generates the signal with the values of the selected index range and ignores all other list entries Remote command SOURce hw LIST INDex STARt on page 856 SOURce hw LIST INDex STOP on page 856 6 10 6 3 Import Export Sett...

Page 342: ...ab Semicolon Comma or Space Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension on page 861 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal on page 862 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn on page 862 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension on page 816 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal on page 817 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn on ...

Page 343: ...ct on page 818 Import Export Imports or exports the selected data list file depending on the current mode Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange EXECute on page 861 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange EXECute on page 817 6 10 7 List Editor The User Correction and List Mode dialogs provide a build in list editor for defining the corresponding value pairs The table and navigation functions of the UCOR a...

Page 344: ... data provides a table with RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions Access to Edit User Correction Data RF RF Level User Correction Edit User Cor Data The editor for user correction provides a table with RF frequency and power val ues an extra column for defining variable dwell times and standard navigation functions Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode ...

Page 345: ...44 Fill with Sensor 344 Save As Save 344 Fill 344 Edit List Mode Data Table with values for list or user correction processing Note Once you enter a value the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns This functionality protects against data loss otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving You can simply override these values Frequency Hz Sets the frequency values Remote ...

Page 346: ...ill Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user defined values To fill the table select Fill Note Once you enter a value or fill a column the editor automatically adds preset val ues in the other columns This functionality protects against data loss otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving You can simply override these values From Range Defines the start line and numb...

Page 347: ... the Advanced tab trigger the sweep Auto 9 In the General tab select State On Example Fast changing frequency and level settings in list mode The following example shows you how to generate an amplitude modulated RF signal based on list mode data General workflow Since any change of the hardware settings or list entries can affect the RF signal char acteristics directly we recommend that you proce...

Page 348: ...RF signal whose frequency and level values change according to the dwell times as defined in the list With active list mode the generator displays no frequency and level values in the status bar but you can check the following parameters In the list mode dialog the current index indicates the steps of the signal gener ation In remote control mode you can query The current state with SOURce hw LIST...

Page 349: ...the modulating signal Signal sources If fully equipped the R S SMBV100B modulates signals from the following sources Internal modulation source Two LF generators Each of the LF generators provides a modulation signal with sine pulse trian gle or trapezoid shape Noise generator The noise generator supplies white noise with selectable bandwidth and distri bution High performance pulse generator Gene...

Page 350: ...me for both signals The external modulation signal must have a voltage of US 1 V UEFF 0 707 V to achieve the displayed modulation depth and range Note that the input voltage does not exceed 1 V otherwise modulation distortions can occur For more information see data sheet Interactions and characteristics Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously For more informatio...

Page 351: ...lation Source The Modulation dialog contains all functions and settings to configure the analog modulations the LF signal sources for performing a modulation and the LF signal output The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12 16 3 2 SOURce AM Subsystem on page 689 Chapter 12 16 3 3 SOURce FM Subsystem on page 694 Chapter 12 16 3 4 SOURce PM Subsystem on page ...

Page 352: ...ources on page 347 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 3 5 SOURce PULM Subsystem on page 703 Settings State 350 Source 350 Transition Type 351 Video Polarity 351 State Activates pulse modulation and triggers the following automatic settings Pulse generator is activated The signal is output at the Pulse Video connector To deactivate the signal outpu...

Page 353: ...e if you are working with devices that are sensitive to steep slopes Remote command SOURce hw PULM TTYPe on page 708 Video Polarity Sets the polarity of the internally generated pulse video modulating signal related to the RF modulated signal This signal synchronizes the pulse generator signal and the RF signal Normal The video signal level follows the RF signal that means it is high and low simul...

Page 354: ...settings 353 Deviation 353 Deviation Mode 353 Total Deviation 354 Ratio Path2 Path1 354 Mode 354 PhiM settings 354 Deviation 354 Deviation Mode 355 Total Deviation 355 Ratio Path2 Path1 355 Mode 355 AM settings 356 Depth 356 Sensitivity 356 Deviation Mode 356 Total Depth 357 Ratio Path2 Path1 357 State Activates a modulation Note Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultan...

Page 355: ...he maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Maximal possible deviation is selected automatically if one of the following applies The selected deviation is too high for the particular frequency The selected frequency is outside of the range where deviation is possible A warning message indicates this situation too Remote command SOURce hw FM ch D...

Page 356: ...e deviation ratio path2 to path1 in percent Example If the deviation in path1 is 10 kHz and the ratio is 50 the deviation in path 2 is auto matically set to 5 kHz Remote command SOURce hw FM RATio on page 698 Mode FM settings Selects the mode of the frequency modulation High Bandwidth The maximum range for modulation bandwidth is available Low Noise Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious c...

Page 357: ...nge the deviation of any path the R S SMBV100B adjusts the value of the other path Remote command SOURce hw PM DEViation MODE on page 702 Total Deviation PhiM settings In Deviation Mode Fixed Total sets the sum of the signal deviation for path 1 and path 2 Deviation of both paths always sum up to the value of the total deviation Behavior when changing any depth settings Changing the total deviatio...

Page 358: ...pth AM settings Determines the depth of the modulation signal in percent The depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power PEP Remote command SOURce hw AM ch DEPTh on page 692 Sensitivity AM settings Sets the input sensitivity of the external modulation signal Remote command SOURce hw AM ch SENSitivity on page 694 Deviation Mode AM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both paths a...

Page 359: ...changing any depth settings Changing the total depth adjusts the depths of both paths proportionally Changing the depth of one path adjusts the depth of the other path The sum always results in the set total depth Remote command SOURce hw AM DEPTh SUM on page 693 Ratio Path2 Path1 AM settings Sets the deviaton ratio of the signal depth for path 2 to path 1 in per cent when using combined sources U...

Page 360: ...358 Trigger Mode 359 Pulse Period 361 Pulse Width 361 Double Pulse Width 362 Pulse Delay 362 Double Pulse Delay 362 Pulse Output State 362 Show Connector 362 Pulse Output Polarity 362 Execute Single Trigger 362 Pulse Mode Sets the operating mode of the pulse generator Depending on the selection the instru ment displays the associated parameters Single Generates a single pulse in one pulse period D...

Page 361: ...from an external signal See also Input and output connectors on page 348 Auto Generates the internal modulation signal continuously Single The pulse generator is triggered by an internal trigger event initiated with Execute Single Trigger The pulse signal is generated once Ext Single Generates a single pulse signal triggered by an external signal Analog Modulations ...

Page 362: ...trigger signal input with Trigger Input Polarity Normal the positive slope is active 2 Sync signal 3 Pulse signal Δt Trigger delay between the trigger and the sync signal start see data sheet delay Pulse Delay 100 ns PW Pulse Width 100 ns Example Generation of double pulse signal Pulse Mode Dou ble using Trigger Mode Ext Triggered 1 External trigger signal input with Trigger Input Polarity Normal ...

Page 363: ...put Polarity Normal the positive slope is active 2 Sync signal 3 Pulse signal Δt Trigger delay between the trigger and the sync signal start see data sheet delay Pulse Delay 100 ns PW Pulse Width 100 ns period Pulse Period 300 ns time between the pulse start of two consecutive pul ses a Gate active duration pulses are generated during the gate active part Remote command SOURce hw PULM TRIGger MODE...

Page 364: ...t State Activates the output of the pulse modulation signal Remote command SOURce hw PGENerator OUTPut STATe on page 865 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument Pulse Output Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal Remote command SOURce hw PGENerator OUTPut POLarity on page 865 Execute Sin...

Page 365: ...You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the graph in more detail Zoom Position Sets the focus on the time axis where to enlarge the graph Zoom In Enlarges the graph at the selected position Zoom Out for the reverse operation 6 11 4 5 Pulse External Trigger Settings Access Select RF Analog Modulation Pulse Modulation Pulse External Trigger Analog Modulations ...

Page 366: ...ty on page 708 Impedance Sets the input impedance Remote command SOURce hw PULM IMPedance on page 709 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument 6 11 4 6 FM PhiM and AM Modulation Sources Access Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source In the Sources tab you can configure an LF modulation signal for ...

Page 367: ...tate LF frequency sweep 365 Shape 366 Frequency 367 Period 367 Pulse Width 367 Pulse Duty Cycle 367 Triangle Rise 367 Trapezoid Rise Fall 368 Trapezoid High 368 State LF frequency sweep Status of the LF frequency sweep signal You find this parameter in two dialogs LF Frequency Sweep turns on off the signal generation See Sweep Mode Settings for access Analog Modulation Sources displays the current...

Page 368: ...Manual 1178 4460 02 03 Shape Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal The Triangle and Trapezoid waveforms require option R S SMBVB K24 Sine 1 Period Pulse 1 Pulse period 2 Pulse width Triangle 1 Triangle period 2 Triangle rise Analog Modulations ...

Page 369: ...nals is calculated from the selected Frequency Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze PERiod on page 846 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRIangle PERiod on page 846 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe PERiod on page 844 Pulse Width Sets the pulse duration of the generated pulse signal Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe WIDTh on page 845 Pulse Duty Cycle Sets the ratio between t...

Page 370: ...mand SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze HIGH on page 845 Source External Settings Access Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source External The External settings section contains all parameters required to configure the signal of an externally supplied LF signal Settings Coupling AC DC 368 Impedance 369 Bandwidth 369 Show Connector 369 Coupling AC DC Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for the...

Page 371: ...Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch BANDwidth on page 840 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument Source Noise Generator Settings Access Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source Noise Generator The Noise Generator settings contain all parameters to configure the signal of the internal noise generato...

Page 372: ... in 100 KHz steps Remote command SOURce hw NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth on page 863 SOURce hw NOISe BWIDth STATe on page 863 6 11 4 7 LF Signal Output Settings Access Select RF Analog Modulation LF Output In the LF Output tab you can configure the signal at the LF outputs determine the output voltage or add a DC offset Activate both paths to output the sum signal of the two sources See also Chapter 6 11...

Page 373: ...ts the signal also used by the frequency or phase modulations Noise Generator Selects the internally generated noise signal External Selects an externally supplied LF signal Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch SOURce on page 843 Output Voltage Sets the voltage peak of the selected LF output source Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch INTernal VOLTage on page 842 DC Offset Adds a DC offset to the LF out...

Page 374: ...Lative on page 864 Noise Level Noise Generator Indicates the level of the noise signal per Hz within the total bandwidth absolute Remote command SOURce hw NOISe LEVel ABSolute on page 864 6 11 4 8 Overview Option AM and FM PM require R S SMBVB K720 Access Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source Overview Blue color Active output signal AM and FM Gray color Inactive output signal LF Out Miniat...

Page 375: ...y exclusive LFOut Label for the LF output settings in the overview Remote command n a AM Label for the amplitude modulation settings in the overview Remote command n a FM PhiM Selects the modulation signal to be assigned to the output You can assign the fre quency or phase modulated signal Remote command n a 6 11 5 How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal The following examples use the intern...

Page 376: ... and level of the RF signal 1 Press Preset 2 In the status bar set Frequency 4 GHz 3 Set Level 25 dBm To configure the pulse generator 1 Select RF Analog Modulation Pulse Generator 2 Select Pulse Mode Double 3 Set Pulse Period 10 us 4 Set Pulse Width 2 us 5 Set Double Pulse Width 1 2 us 6 Set Double Pulse Delay 4 5 us 7 Activate Pulse Output State 8 Set Trigger Mode Auto In the Pulse Graph tab you...

Page 377: ... S NRP power sensors support RF signal level optimization by determining the attenuation characteristics of downstream devices or cables or by monitoring the RF signal level at the output directly The R S SMBV100B uses the readings of a sensor for compensation of losses and thus improving the accuracy of the RF signal level You can configure the measurement parameters of a power sensor directly in...

Page 378: ... for obtaining uninterrupted level settings with constant VSWR The configuration RF Off Mode Unchanged ensures that constant VSWR is maintained if you turn the signal off and on again Noise sensitive applications The parameter RF OFF Mode Full Attenuation sets maximum attenuation and thus suppresses noise when you turn off the RF signal 6 12 1 1 Attenuator Settings Access Select RF RF Level Level ...

Page 379: ... mode if a constant VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio is required Full Attenuation Switches to the maximum attenuation Use this mode for applications that require a high level of noise sup pression Remote command SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation RFOFf MODE on page 869 6 12 1 2 Reverse Power Protection The R S SMBV100B is equipped with a reverse power protection circuit The reverse power protection is tr...

Page 380: ... all operating modes On Activates the internal level control permanently regardless of the operating condi tions This setting provides the highest level accuracy Off Table Deactivates internal level control loop The instrument calculates every level setting using the attenuation values from the internal ALC table Level attenuation between two table values is done with linear interpolation This mod...

Page 381: ...ct the DUT from damage due to high input power use the setting Sample Level Attenuated or Sample Level Minimum 6 12 2 1 ALC Settings Access Select RF RF Level Automatic Level Control In the ALC dialog you can configure the settings for the automatic level control of the RF signal to achieve optimal accuracy The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 15 SO...

Page 382: ...RF output power To protect the DUT from damage due to high input power use the setting Sample Level Attenuated or Sample Level Minimum Off Table Controls the level using the attenuation values of the internal ALC table Table On Starts with the attenuation setting from the table and continues with automatic level control Remote command SOURce hw POWer ALC STATe on page 867 Detector Sensitivity Dete...

Page 383: ...high input power Minimum Attenuates the signal level with the maximum value Remote command SOURce hw POWer ALC SLEVel on page 869 6 12 3 User Correction The R S SMBV100B supports a correction function to compensate external losses caused for example by the RF cable to achieve a precise target input level at the DUT The signal at the RF outputs of the R S SMBV100B is flat However the DUT is usu all...

Page 384: ...ain the correction data by inverting the collected data load the correction parameters in the R S SMBV100B 3 In the R S SMBV100B the RF signal is pre processed with the correction values so that the signal at the outputs is the inverted version of the external losses 4 Received at the DUT input the pre processed signal if flat With active UCOR the generator adds the correction value internally and...

Page 385: ...owing options Manually row by row Fill the table automatically with linearly interpolated values calculated based on value range and step size Acquire the real frequency response characteristics of the used component with the R S NRP power sensor see Understanding the principle of user correction Using a power sensor for frequency response measurements Consider the following when using R S NRP pow...

Page 386: ...d confirm with Ok c Choose the file and confirm with Select d Select Edit UCOR Data e To fill the user corerction data table proceed as described in Chapter 6 12 3 User Correction on page 381 4 Select block diagram RF On 5 Select State On The UCOR dialog contains all settings for creating and handling files with user defined level correction values The remote commands required to define these sett...

Page 387: ...eral editor function to create internally new file or to edit an existing one Use the standard file manager function to load externally created files to the instru ment Remote command SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog on page 815 SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect on page 814 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete on page 816 Edit UCOR Data Opens the build in table editor to define a new correction table or edi...

Page 388: ...ist mode data provides a table with RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions Access to Edit User Correction Data RF RF Level User Correction Edit User Cor Data The editor for user correction provides a table with RF frequency and power val ues an extra column for defining variable dwell times and standard navigation functions Improving Level Performance ...

Page 389: ...7 Edit 388 Fill with Sensor 388 Save As Save 388 Fill 388 Edit List Mode Data Table with values for list or user correction processing Note Once you enter a value the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns This functionality protects against data loss otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving You can simply override these values Frequency Hz Sets the frequency values...

Page 390: ...nction Fill Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user defined values To fill the table select Fill Note Once you enter a value or fill a column the editor automatically adds preset val ues in the other columns This functionality protects against data loss otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving You can simply override these values From Range Defines the start line ...

Page 391: ...with Sensor 389 Used SMBV100B Settings For Measurement 390 Fill User Correction Data with Sensor Sensor Displays connected sensors for selection List To Fill Indicates the used list Use SParameter Indicates whether SParameter correction in the R S NRP power sensor is used Include Zeroing Performs a zeroing procedure before acquiring the user correction data to improve precision No signal is applie...

Page 392: ...RRection CSET DATA SENSor ch POWer SONCe on page 814 Used SMBV100B Settings For Measurement Displays the settings relevant for the measurement Modulation Indicates the modulation state Amplitude Shows the currently set level Remote command n a 6 12 3 4 Import Export List Files Access 1 Select one of the following RF Sweep List List mode RF RF Level User Correction 2 Select Import Export Figure 6 2...

Page 393: ...csv or txt format Decimal Point Sets Point dot or Comma as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data with floating point numerals Column Separator Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table Available are Tab Semicolon Comma or Space Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension on page 861 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal on page 862 SOURce hw LIST DEXCha...

Page 394: ...termine attenuation characteristics of downstream equipment or cables You can use the mea sured values to compensate the losses with internal control functions or with an exter nal control circuit in real time R S NRP sensors are highly accurate standalone measuring devices suitable for a wide range of applications The devices communicate directly with the signal genera tor calculate the average o...

Page 395: ...sor hub high speed USB 2 0 can host up to 4 R S NRP sensors It provides simultaneous internal and external triggering of all con nected sensors Requires additional cables depending on the used output connector of the hub Choose one of the following Short extension cable R S NRP Z2 for connection to the sensor connector This six pole connection provides the external trigger capability Standard USB ...

Page 396: ...00B immediately starts the measurement of a detec ted R S NRP power sensor If you perform an instrument preset Preset key or RST the R S SMBV100B stops the measurements The connection and the map ping of the power sensors remain the measurements must be restarted 6 12 4 2 NRP Sensor Mapping The NRP Sensor Mapping lists all R S NRP sensors detected by the instrument Any R S NRP sensor that supports...

Page 397: ...ensor is connected via LAN or uses the USBTMC protocol its protocol is indica ted as Visa Remote command SLISt LIST on page 652 SLISt ELEMent ch MAPPing on page 653 SLISt SENSor MAP on page 653 Scan Scans the network and the USB connections for sensors connected via the VISA com munication protocol i e sensors that are addressed via LAN or USBTMC Sensors communicating via the USB legacy protocol a...

Page 398: ...ent time The filter length can be selected automatically or it can be manually set to a fixed value Depending on the R S NRP power sensor type the manual setting of the filter length varies in resolution Resolution 1 for the R S NRPxx power sensor family Resolution 2n for R S NRP Zxx power sensors with n 1 to 16 Follow the following general recommendation to find out the optimum filter length Alwa...

Page 399: ... than 10 dB above the lower measurement limit Switch off the RF power source for zeroing but do not disconnect it from the power sensor This proceeding keeps the thermal equilibrium and the zeroing process also compensates the noise that superimposes the measured signal e g from a broadband amplifier Related settings and functions Measurements related settings like results filter filter length NRP...

Page 400: ...l offset The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 14 SENSe READ INITiate and SLISt Subsystems on page 649 includ ing the triggering of the measurement and the retrieval of measurement results Settings Sensor type and serial number 399 Level Peak Level Average 399 Sensor Mapping 399 Sensor Settings 399 State 399 Zero 399 Display 399 Permanent 400 Use Freque...

Page 401: ...u can also change the unit for the results display Watt dBm or dBμV Note Peak level measurements are provided if the power sensor supports this feature Remote command READ ch POWer on page 654 SENSe ch UNIT POWer on page 654 Sensor Mapping Accesses the NRP Sensor Mapping dialog Sensor Settings One tab per sensor provides the corresponding setting parameters State Sensor Settings Activates level me...

Page 402: ...uency converter doubles the frequency you can set twice the frequency in the R S SMBV100B The R S power sen sor considers this RF frequency setting Set the parameter Frequency to the measurement s frequency Remote command SENSe ch POWer SOURce on page 660 Frequency Sensor Settings Defines the frequency value if Source User is used Remote command SENSe ch POWer FREQuency on page 659 Level Offset St...

Page 403: ...maximum acceptable measurement time which limits the averaging factor and therefore leads to a more unstable readout Remote command SENSe ch POWer FILTer TYPE on page 658 Filter Length Sensor Settings Sets or indicates the filter length depending on the selected filter mode Filter Auto indicates the automatically adjusted filter length Filter User enables you to set the filter length manually Filt...

Page 404: ...vided as part of the free R S NRP Toolkit software For more information refer to the manual of the connected R S NRP power sensor Remote command SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice STATe on page 655 SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice LIST on page 656 SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice SELect on page 655 Enable Logging Sensor Settings Activates recording of R S NRP power sensor readings in a log fil...

Page 405: ...n the mapping table 4 In the Mapping column assign the sensor to a sensor channel see Chap ter 6 12 4 2 NRP Sensor Mapping on page 394 5 Close the dialog To configure and calibrate the R S NRP in the R S SMBV100B Provided the power sensor is connected to the R S SMBV100B and is assigned to a sensor channel we recommend that you calibrate and configure the power sensor in the NRP Power Viewer dialo...

Page 406: ... a file New Filename and confirm with OK 4 Select the new file with Select 5 Select Edit UCOR Data 6 Select Edit Fill The Fill Table dialog enables you to fill in the values of the columns automatically 7 To fill in the frequency column a Select Select Column To Fill Frequency Hz b Select Range e g 15 to determine the number of values c Select Start Value e g 1 56 GHz d Select Increment Value e g ...

Page 407: ...ively sets each frequency point reads the measured power of the sensor and fills in the value in the correction table 10 Select Save to save the data in the file 11 Close the dialog To perform power leveling calibration with user correction data We assume that a user correction file is available in the user directory of the R S SMBV100B or on a memory stick or in a shared directory If you have cre...

Page 408: ... view the file content select Edit UCOR Data 6 Select UCOR Data State On to apply the user correction values When you activate the RF output the R S SMBV100B considers the user correc tion data and adjusts the signal level accordingly to compensate external frequency responses Improving Level Performance ...

Page 409: ...nction and visualize a subset of signal characteristics 7 1 1 Required Options The minimum equipment layout for using this function includes the base unit 7 1 2 About the Graphical Signal Display To ease the setting and routing of baseband signals R S SMBV100B is able to cap ture these signals and display them graphically in different ways as I Q vector eye or constellation diagram as power spectr...

Page 410: ...er time Figure 7 1 I Q diagram with markers window with two separate coordinate systems with identical X and Y axes X axis time represented as number of symbols chips or samples depending on the signal Y axis amplitude scaled to the peak envelope power where minimum scaled amplitude 1 maximum scaled amplitude 1 Application To analyze impairments added noise and signals e g from external baseband i...

Page 411: ...mode shows the signal like an oscilloscope X Y mode Signal acquisition points See Table 7 2 Constellation Diagram Constellation diagrams display the modulation symbols as discrete points in the I Q plane Unlike the vector diagram the constellation diagram displays only one sample per symbol This sample represents the symbol Constellation diagrams are helpful when generating signals using the Custo...

Page 412: ...cation To classify modulation Signal acquisition points See Table 7 2 Eye Diagram The eye diagram displays synchronized and superimposed sections of either the in phase or the quadrature components of the signal Figure 7 4 Eye diagram with partially closed eye QPSK X axis time in the range of 1 symbol Y axis amplitude scaled to the peak envelope power where minimum scaled amplitude 1 maximum scale...

Page 413: ...power where the average power RMS corresponds to the origin Y axis Probability of exceeding the average power that is the percentage of time the signal spends at or above the power level specified by the X axis Marker 1 Interpolation 10 3 of the samples exceed 3 3 dB above average simularilly 1 of the samples exceed 7 5 dB above avarage not shown with a marker Marker 2 The point where the trace cr...

Page 414: ... that are used for calculating a part FFT AVG indicates the number of subspectra used for averaging X axis frequency plotted symmetrically Sampling Rate 2 to Sampling Rate 2 Y axis power density Signal acquisition points See Table 7 2 7 1 2 2 Signal Acquisition Points Signal characteristics can be displayed using different methods and different acquisi tion points also at the same time The followi...

Page 415: ...ing You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be enlarged Zooming is merely a visual tool it does not change the number of samples used for the calculation You can increase the number of samples before zooming See also To zoom into a diagram on page 424 Using markers Markers are to...

Page 416: ...nt for Data points in areas with high probability are marked in red data points in areas with low probability in blue Thus for example you can observe not only the level versus frequency trace but also a third dimension the probability of the power level Reference trace Reference traces help you analyze a displayed characteristic as do the markers Ref erence traces are used to define amplitude cur...

Page 417: ...ble signal acquisition points use the parameter Source 4 To enable the graphical signal display select Add A thumbnail of the graphical signal display is shown in the taskbar Figure 7 9 Graphics configuration dialog with active graphical signal displays 5 To enlarge the thumbnail select it Settings Graphical Diagrams Table 416 Mode 416 Source 416 Displaying Baseband Signal Characteristics in Real ...

Page 418: ...ce BB GRAPhics SOURce on page 808 FFT Length In Mode Power Sepectrum selects the number of samples to be included in the graph of the power spectrum Remote command SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTLen on page 809 Full Scale dBFS In Mode Power Spectrum determines the normalization of the power values in the diagram Observe the change in the units on the y axis On The maximal digital power I Q max is mapped to...

Page 419: ...ion corre sponds to a display covering the entire signal bandwidth The higher the resolution the shorter the length of the displayed signal segment Auto The resolution is set to an optimum value in terms of signal and dis play type Full Bandwidth The resolution is set so that the display covers the entire signal band width User Activates the Sample Rate input field where you can manually set the r...

Page 420: ...1 Select Taskbar System Config Graphics Add 2 Double click the thumbnail in the taskbar Figure 7 10 Graphical signal display of a power spectrum with markers This section focuses on the functions of the enlarged graphical signal displays Settings Configure 418 Stop Run 419 Zoom Out 419 Reference Curves 419 Display Units 419 Show Hide marker 419 Reference Curve 419 Configure Opens the Graphics Conf...

Page 421: ...diagram on page 424 Reference Curves Accesses the dialog for defining reference curves see Reference Curve on page 419 Display Units Changes the units of the X axis The available values depend on the generated signal Show Hide marker Sets two markers to the displayed signal or hides them See also Using markers on page 413 To enable markers to readout exact measured data on page 424 Reference Curve...

Page 422: ... section shows you how to use the different graphic modes to visualize the signal characteristics of the generated signal It shows also how to observe the effect of stan dard settings like applied filter an enabled fading or AWGN The examples use a sim ple custom digital modulated signal To generate a simple WCDMA 3GPP QPSK 45 offset signal Use the custom digital modulation Enable a predefined WCD...

Page 423: ... Baseband 4 To view the signal select Add A new thumbnail minimized view indicating the constellation diagram appears in the Taskbar 5 To enlarge the constellation diagram select it The displayed constellation diagram confirms the used modulation type see Fig ure 7 11 Displaying Baseband Signal Characteristics in Real Time ...

Page 424: ...and verify a baseband frequency offset 1 In Baseband Baseband Offsets set Baseband Frequency Offset 1 Hz 2 In the Constellation Diagram select Configure The Graphics Configuration dialog opens 3 Add a vector diagram with signal acquisition point Stream and enlarge it The vector diagram rotates with 1 Hz Displaying Baseband Signal Characteristics in Real Time ...

Page 425: ...am 4 Reset the baseband frequency offset to 0 Hz The vector diagram does not rotate any more To visualize the effect of the filter parameters on the generated signal 1 Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Filter Roll Off Factor 0 99 The vector diagram changes Displaying Baseband Signal Characteristics in Real Time ...

Page 426: ...ching for magnifying images on your cell phone If the diagram is zoomed an overview window appears 3 Move the visible area in the graphics or in the overview window 4 For the reverse operation select Zoom out To enable markers to readout exact measured data In an enlarged diagram 1 Select Show Marker Two markers appear one over the other 2 To position the markers select and shift them M2 M1 indica...

Page 427: ... Noise 2 Select AWGN General Min Noise System Bandwidth Ratio 3 3 Select Noise Power Output Results Carrier Noise Ratio 30 dB 4 Select AWGN State On 5 Observe the power spectrum display The power spectrum shows a noise floor with constant level and the spectrum of the digitally modulated signal in this case the WCDMA signal with a bandwidth of 3 84 MHz Displaying Baseband Signal Characteristics in...

Page 428: ...current screen and stores it in a file with a predefined filename in the default user directory var user See Chapter 9 10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings on page 503 3 Use on of the standard file transfer methods to access the user directory of the instrument Transfer the file to a PC See Chapter 9 9 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument on page 497 4 Print the file content Dis...

Page 429: ... settings and step by step instructions Synchronizing Instruments 427 Generating Phase Coherent Signals 427 Generating Time Aligned Baseband Signals 428 Control and Operation of External Instruments 435 System Configuration Settings 442 Digital Baseband Input Settings 455 I Q Analog Output Settings 464 8 1 Synchronizing Instruments For information on the possible scenarios concerning the distribut...

Page 430: ...n Master Slave Mode About the master slave mode When connected in master slave mode two or more R S SMBV100B or one R S SMBV100B and several other signal generators such as R S SGT or R S SMBV can generate synchronous and time aligned signals In this mode the master instrument generates and outputs a dedicated synchroniza tion signal Sync Out that has to be fed into the slave instrument The slave ...

Page 431: ... Config System Configuration Multi Instrument Select Block Diagram I Q Stream Mapper System Configuration Multi Instrument On the instrument front panel press Setup Select System Configuration Multi Instrument For step by step description see Chapter 8 3 1 2 How to Connect and Configure Instruments in Master Slave Mode on page 430 Settings State 429 Multi Instrument Trigger 430 Synchronisation Sta...

Page 432: ...al connection the synchronization signal is not connected as required For details see Chapter 8 3 1 2 How to Connect and Configure Instruments in Master Slave Mode on page 430 The slave instrument does not detect the synchronization signal Remote command SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument TRIGger SYNChronization on page 665 Global Connector Settings Provides a quick access to the related global connec...

Page 433: ...rce Salve One or more cascaded instruments receiving and forwarding the synchroniza tion and trigger signal Ref Out Ref In Reference frequency connectors User x Synchronization and trigger signal connectors RF Signal output Connect User 5 connector of the master R S SMBV100B to User 4 con nector of the first slave Connect User 5 connector of the first slave to the User 4 connector of the second sl...

Page 434: ...band Sync Out is output at the User 5 6 If you use star configuration in the Global Connector Settings dialog for all con nectors on that you want to output the synchronization signal a Set Direction Output b Set Signal Baseband Sync Out 7 Configure the baseband signal as required for the particular test setup Configure the trigger signal for example as follows a Select Baseband EUTRA LTE Trigger ...

Page 435: ... observe the value of the parameter System Config Multi Instruments Synchronization State The instruments are synchronized if The physical connection is established The synchronization signal is routed property The baseband generators in all generators are active Compensate signal mis alignment 1 Connect an oscilloscopes or network analyzer Observe the generated signals 2 Compare the signal start ...

Page 436: ...age 434 Connect all instruments to a common external trigger source See Chapter 2 3 4 Enabling and Configuring a Marker Signal on page 60 Example Triggering several R S SMBV100B instruments simultaneously This example shows you how to connect several R S SMBV100B distribute the trig ger signal generated by the first one R S SMBV100B 1 and trigger the instruments simultaneously Required cabling and...

Page 437: ...he settings are grouped in the System configuration External RF and I Q dialog In this dialog you find an overview of all available I Q input and output connectors and config ure the connection to the external instruments Once the connection is established the R S SMBV100B acts as a master instrument and controls the setup related parameters of any connected further processing exter nal instrument...

Page 438: ...nd the used I Q output signal digi tal analog single ended or analog differential 8 4 1 3 Control of Connected External Instruments For any connected external instruments you find related information like the connec tion status and the used RF level and frequency values in the External RF and I Q dia log This dialog provides also additional short information on each of the connected instruments 8 ...

Page 439: ...ect communication with other Rohde Schwarz instruments like Signal generators R S FSW signal and spectrum analyzer Application examples of the externally supplied digital baseband signal Provided the instrument is equipped with the required options the externally applied signals can be used for and further processed as follows Used as a standalone baseband source and processed separately e g detun...

Page 440: ...ignal can be defined manually or auto matically retrieved from the input and estimated for the output signal Crest factor According to its definition the crest factor gives the difference in level between the peak level and RMS level value in dB see Figure 8 3 The R S SMBV100B uses the crest factor to calculate the power levels that is the instrument compensates the RMS levels of the externally su...

Page 441: ... What is a digital channel and how are the channels distributed to the base bands The external digital signals supplied at the Dig I Q interfaces of the instrument may contain more than one possibly even multiplexed digital channels The R S SMBV100B processes each of these digital channels as a separate signal Fulfilling the prerequisites for a correct signal processing of the externally sup plied...

Page 442: ... The internal gain control mechanism uses these received values to adjust the input signal gain to achieve an optimal dynamic range Sample Rate External input signals with sample rates different than the system clock are resam pled as illustrated on Figure 8 4 Figure 8 4 Resampling principle of external digital baseband signals Max sample rate depends on connected device finput Max sample rate The...

Page 443: ... additional external electric network To achieve an optimal and bal anced operating point of these inputs ensure the correct adjustment of the used DC voltage Bias and the offset Offset between inverting and non inverting output Refer to the descriptions Bias EMF and Offset EMF for a description of the effect of these parameters Maximum overall output voltage The voltage of the analog output signa...

Page 444: ... Configuration Settings The settings in this dialog comprise the I Q mapping and the processing of the gener ated I Q streams Form this dialog you can control and configure the connections to instruments connected to the RF and I Q connectors Required options The equipment layout includes Base unit Option differential analog I Q outputs R S SMBVB K17 Optional option frequency R S SMBVB B10 KB106 S...

Page 445: ...hase Offset Sets the phase offset of the corresponding stream Map Stream X to Connector The mapping of the generated stream to the output connectors is represented as a stream matrix A blue circle at a matrix element routes the stream to the selected con nector Remote command SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing RF STReam st STATe on page 665 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing IQOutput STReam st STATe on page...

Page 446: ...equency of the R S SMBV100B Access Select Taskbar System Config System Configuration External RF and I Q The dialog provides an overview of all available I Q input and output connectors and comprises the settings necessary to establish the connection to the external instruments Displayed is an overview of the currently connected external instru ments together with relevant information like the con...

Page 447: ...e only the connectors to which a stream is mapped Note To prevent faults use this filter before you further configure the external instruments Input Connectors Output Connectors Filters the display according to connector direction Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal DISPlay on page 666 Auto Connect With enabled auto connect function the instrument automatically detects connected external instru...

Page 448: ... a reboot set Auto Connect On Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote CONNect ALL on page 667 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote DISConnect ALL on page 667 Preset behavior Keep connections to external instruments Sets the effect of R S SMBV100B preset Preset or RST on the following The connection status between the instrument and the connected external instru ments The R S SMBV100B itself and th...

Page 449: ...I Q connection of the digital interfaces The indication includes a status LED and an icon where the icon depends on the HW connector Dig I Q or HS Dig I Q used Indication Designation A green LED and an icon The Dig I Q interface is used as an input connector A yellow LED and an icon The Dig I Q HS Dig I Q interface is used as an output connector An icon without an LED An external instrument is con...

Page 450: ...s are coupled to Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital INAMe on page 669 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput INAMe on page 669 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote INFO on page 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote INFO on page 674 RF Couple If enabled this parameter couples all major RF setting like the RF Frequency the RF Level and the RF State of the external instrument to the R S...

Page 451: ...ut state of the connected external instrument The parameter is coupled to the state of the RF output of the R S SMBV100B In uncoupled mode enables disables the RF output in the external instrument Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital RF STATe on page 671 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput RF STATe on page 671 8 5 2 2 External Instrument Configuration Settings Access 1 Select Taskbar System...

Page 452: ...n the External Instrument Configuration dialog manually or use one of the provided Detect Scan functions Both functions consider the connections via the supported interfaces USB or LAN The parameter External Instrument lists the pool of available instruments Scans the network for connected supported instruments like R S SGS or R S SGT Note The scan function searches throughout the entire network a...

Page 453: ... one of the following Enable Select Instrument New and configure the settings manually Select Select Instrument navigate trough the pool of available instruments and select the required The required settings are retrieved and updated automatically Select None to disable the connection Execute Apply to confirm the settings Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote LIST on page 672 SCONfiguratio...

Page 454: ...s active the R S SMBV100B performs the following Sends the command DEVice PRESet Sends the content of the initialization sequence file to reconfigure the external instrument If necessary perform further settings and configuration of the external instruments Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote INITialization CATalog on page 675 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote INITialization FILE on...

Page 455: ...al Instruments Config 3 In the Dig Conn Name External Instrument Configuration dialog select Remote Control In this dialog you can send individual SCPI commands or a sequence of SCPI commands to the connected instruments The sent commands and their results are displayed in the Command Trace field as long as the trace is not deleted Clear Trace The sent commands are also listed in the History list ...

Page 456: ...uence After a command is sent the next command form the sequence is selected See also Initialization Sequence on page 452 Chapter 9 5 1 File Select Settings on page 487 History Clear History List of the sent commands As long as this history list is not cleared Clear History you can select a command from the list and send it again Commands Trace Clear Trace List of the sent commands and their resul...

Page 457: ... See Chapter 8 5 2 External RF and I Q Settings on page 443 Connections for remote control of connected external I Q and RF devices Input and output signals like LO coupling or used external reference frequency Connected external baseband source to the digital input interface Hotspots for fast access to the required settings Several of the displayed elements are hotspots Select an element to acces...

Page 458: ...le configuration parameters of the external signal The digital baseband input interface Dig I Q and HS Dig I Q are located on the R S SMBV100B rear panel see Overview of the Baseband Signal Sources on page 437 In the default instrument state the block diagram displays the connector in an unfolded state The digital input interface is inactive 1 To display the BB Input block if the connectors are fo...

Page 459: ...BB Input On or Select BB Input Baseband Input Settings State On The internal baseband generator Baseband block and the external digital baseband input BB Input cannot be activated simultaneously They deactivate each other The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 16 2 SOURce BBIN Subsystem on page 681 Settings General Settings 457 Signal Input Settings 459 ...

Page 460: ...ave no effect because the baseband input interfaces cannot be activa ted Enables the feeding of the selected external digital signals into the baseband Note The internal baseband generator Baseband block and the external digital baseband input BB Input cannot be activated simultaneously They deactivate each other Remote command SOURce hw BBIN STATe on page 683 Interface Indicates the used digital ...

Page 461: ...s displayed by the parameter Sample Rate Remote command SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SOURce on page 686 Connected Device If the connection to the external device is properly established and signal transmission is active this parameter displays information on the instrument connected to the Dig I Q interface Name and serial number of the connected instrument The transmitter sample rate if supported by the ...

Page 462: ...ated Link Sample Rate 461 DIG IQ Auto Setting 461 Measurement Period 462 Auto Level Set 462 Channel Table Displays information on the up to 8 digital channels per HS Dig I Q interface Number Channel Table Subsequent number Name Channel Table Channel indication retrieved form the digital interface Remote command SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 NAME on page 684 Digital Baseband Input Settings ...

Page 463: ... BBIN CHANnel ch0 POWer RMS on page 685 BB Channel Table Activates the channel Only one channel can be activated at a time Toggle the state of the channel to test all of them subsequently Remote command SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 BB STATe on page 684 Aggregated Link Sample Rate Indicates the aggregated sample rate and the maximum sample rate where The aggregated sample rate is the sum of the sampl...

Page 464: ...input signal See also Fulfilling the prerequisites for a correct signal processing of the externally supplied digital baseband signal on page 439 Remote command SOURce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute on page 687 8 6 3 Sample Rate Settings Access 1 Select BB Input Digital I Q In Baseband Input Settings Interface DIG I Q 2 Select Sample Rate Sample Rate Source 462 Sample Rate Value 463 Sample Rate Source Ind...

Page 465: ...he connected transmitting device Remote command SOURce hw BBIN SRATe ACTual on page 686 8 6 4 Input Level Settings Access 1 Select BB Input Digital I Q In Baseband Input Settings Interface DIG I Q 2 Select Input Level DIG IQ Auto Setting 463 Measurement Period 464 Auto Level Set 464 Crest Factor 464 Peak Level 464 Level 464 DIG IQ Auto Setting Activates an automatic adjustment of the baseband inpu...

Page 466: ...Vel EXECute on page 687 Crest Factor Indicates the crest factor of the external baseband signal See also Important Signal Parameters and Interface s Characteristics on page 438 Remote command SOURce hw BBIN POWer CFACtor on page 687 Peak Level Indicates the peak level of the external baseband signal relative to full scale of 0 5 V in terms of dB full scale See also Important Signal Parameters and ...

Page 467: ... 3 Analog output connector name To configure the I Q Analog Output settings 1 Select the I Q OUT symbol to unfold the I Q Analog block 2 To re route the signal to the analog outputs select the I Q Stream Mapper block 3 To enable the baseband signal at the analog outputs select Block Diagram I Q Analog I Q Analog On 4 To access the dialog box for configuring the analog output signal select I Q Ana ...

Page 468: ...ias voltage must not exceed 4V The following applies Single ended signal Vp Vbias 4 V Differential signal 0 5 Vp Vbias 0 5 Voffset 4 V Where Vp is the output voltage as set with the parameter I Q Level Vp EMF Vbias is the bias voltage as set with the parameter Bias EMF Voffset is the offset between inverting and non inverting output as set with the parameter Offset EMF For more information see dat...

Page 469: ...eep connections to external instruments Off Single Ended On Not affected by the Set to Default I Q Level Vp EMF 1 V Bias EMF 0 mV Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog PRESet on page 833 Save Recall Accesses the Save Recall dialog that is the standard instrument function for saving and recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog ...

Page 470: ...al location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument I Q Output Type Selects the type of output signal The provided parameters in the I Q Analog Outputs dialog depend on the selected output mode Differential Option R S SMBVB K17 If RF Envelope On The inverted envelope signal Ē is output at the I Bar connectors If RF Envelope Off The analog I Q signal components are outpu...

Page 471: ...66 Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut LEVel on page 835 Couple I Q Bias In Variable Mode couples the bias setting of the I signal and the Q signal component With activated coupling the settings of the I signal component automatically apply to the Q signal component Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS COUPling STATe on page 836 Bias EMF If a bias is enabled a DC voltage is superimposed u...

Page 472: ...fset is set with half of the value in posi tive direction at the non inverting outputs in nega tive direction at the inverting outputs A negative offset is set with half of the value in neg ative direction at the non inverting outputs in posi tive direction at the inverting outputs Example Effect of a positive offset on the I signal component I Offset 100 0 mV The offsets applied on the two output...

Page 473: ... 617 For information on how to save the displayed setting in a file refer to Chapter 9 10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings on page 503 About the File System 471 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration 474 Protecting Data 480 Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings 480 Accessing Files with User Data 486 Exporting Remote Command Lists 490 Loading Importing and Exporting Lists 490 Usi...

Page 474: ...an be loa ded in the instrument See Chapter 9 5 Accessing Files with User Data on page 486 Externally generated waveforms can be loaded in the Arbitrary Waveform Genera tion dialog See Chapter 3 6 Using the Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB on page 145 Depending on the data storage method user data can be Persistent i e user files that are recorded on the data storage Data is preserved when instrum...

Page 475: ...natives Connect a memory stick to one of the USB interfaces The instrument recognizes automatically a connected memory stick and assigns the usb drive to it Connect the instrument to a LAN An instrument connected to a LAN supports two standard file transfer methods from a remote client FTP file transfer protocol File sharing according to the SAMBA SMB server message block protocol Both file transf...

Page 476: ...guration data for the operating elements and lists with user data e g dialog positions and a list of user correction data However if a list data is part of the instrument settings a reference to this list is stored not the list itself This approach ensures that the created files contain only relevant information and allows you to transfer instrument settings even between different equipped signal ...

Page 477: ...n It resets all parameters and switching states including also the states of inactive operating modes Network remote access or system settings are retained To execute a preset press the Preset key at the front panel Set to Default Set To Default relates to individual dialogs or tabs and resets the associated set tings of the corresponding dialog All other settings are retained For example you can ...

Page 478: ...s set the parameters and operating modes to default values prede fined by the factory Alternatively to these default settings you can Define user specific recall settings to be restored after a preset see Chapter 9 2 3 How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset on page 478 Store and reload user defined instrument states see Chapter 9 4 2 How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings on pa...

Page 479: ... this Parameter Restores the default value of a single parameter Execute Factory Preset Resets the instrument to its factory settings Note Factory Preset retains all security settings and does not delete any user files like setups or user data See also Table 9 1 that contains the key parameters that are reset by the correspond ing preset functions Remote command SYSTem FPReset on page 616 9 2 2 Ho...

Page 480: ...edefined filename UserPreset savrcltxt Save this file in the directory var user The filename UserPreset savrcltxt and the directory var user are man datory Now when you press the Preset key or send the RST command to the instru ment the defined settings are restored An Info message appears and confirms that a file with user defined preset set ting is loaded 9 2 4 Reference See Table 9 1 for an ove...

Page 481: ...er on settings Level EMF x Network settings x Hostname x GPIB address x Start Stop display update x Display and keyboard settings x Preset behavior Keep connections to external instru ments off x Password and settings protected by passwords e g dis abled LAN or USB Security settings User files setups2 data lists etc 2 UserPreset savrcltxt is renamed as UserPresetInactive savrcltxt an existing file...

Page 482: ... memory of the instrument This data is lost once the instrument is switched off Store user files temporarily in the var volatile directory which remains available only until the instrument is switched off You can access data saved in volatile memory just as data stored permanently in the var user See also Chapter 9 8 3 How to Display All Saved Files on page 495 Activate the volatile mode so that n...

Page 483: ...ble with the supported methods for file handling In the general case a recall process replaces the instruments settings with the saved values An exception is the frequency and level settings During recall of the instrument settings it is possible to retain the current settings or to overwrite them with the stored values Save Recall the settings belonging to a firmware option Each of the firmware o...

Page 484: ...t the Save or Recall function For example select Block Diagram Baseband EUTRA LTE General Save The name of the dialog is context sensitive and differs depending on the particular digital standard The provided functions are similar Settings Operation Mode 483 Directory File List and Filename 483 Recent files 483 Show SCPI List 483 SCPI List 484 Save 484 Save Immediate x 484 Saving and Recalling Ins...

Page 485: ...iles use the dedicated functions New Select Save and Recent files To access the general data list editor use the Edit button see also Chapter 6 10 7 List Editor on page 341 To perform standard file management functions like create directories move copy delete files and or directories use the standard File Manager function see Chap ter 9 8 Using the File Manager on page 491 Remote command To list a...

Page 486: ...e instrument is switched off the contents of the intermediate memories are retained Remote command SAV on page 614 Exclude Frequency The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL on page 825 Exclude Level The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote command SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMedi...

Page 487: ... instrument saves its settings in the intermediate memory 1 The filename and the storage location cannot be changed 3 Adapt the instrument settings as required Select Save Immediate 2 4 To restore the settings select the Operation Mode Recall 5 Select Recall Immediate 1 The instrument is restored to the previous state 6 Select Recall Immediate 2 to switch to the settings stored in the second file ...

Page 488: ...n the first instrument select Baseband Digital Standard e g 3GPP FDD Adjust the settings as required 2 In the 3GPP FDD General tab select Save In the file selection dialog select a filename and storage location for the settings file A file with the defined name and path and a predefined extension 3g is cre ated 3 Connect both instrument to a LAN Alternatively use a USB flash drive to transfer the ...

Page 489: ...st To access a loadable data list file 1 Select the Data List Name in the individual dialog For Baseband 3GPP FDD Base Stations BS1 Channel Table P CCPCH Data Data List for example select DList Patt None A File Select dialog for loading creating and modifying a file is displayed Tip The name of the dialog is context sensitive and differs depending on the par ticular function this dialog is from Ho...

Page 490: ... settings files Define a folder in that these files are saved Navigate through the file system The dialog name changes depending on the context The provided functions are self explanatory and similar Use the settings for example as follows To navigate through the file system use the directory tree To create a file load and save files use the dedicated functions New Select Save and Recent files To ...

Page 491: ... corre sponding SCPI command SOURce hw BB Digital Standard DATA DLISt SOURce hw BB Digital Standard DSELect New Creates file with the specified Filename To confirm select OK use Cancel to undo the operation To edit the file content select File Select Edit Edit Accesses the Data List Editor and loads the selected file for editing See Chapter 3 5 3 7 Data List Editor on page 128 Functions for handli...

Page 492: ... that contain the settings in the form of remote control command sequences The R S SMBV100B also offers an SCPI macro recorder with code generator that is used to record manual settings and create an executable script see Chapter 11 14 How to Record Create SCPI Lists on page 595 Completed scripts are stored in files and possibly converted to different formats depending on the used language of the ...

Page 493: ...90 9 8 Using the File Manager The File Manager is a tool similar to a standard Windows Explorer It helps you man age mass storage media and files stored on the R S SMBV100B You can perform the following tasks Copying multiple files from disk to other media See Chapter 9 9 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument on page 497 Copying files into another directory See Cut Copy Paste and Delete...

Page 494: ...nctions to rename delete copy or move individual files 9 8 1 File Manager Settings Access Select Save Rcl File Manager Settings Map Network Share 492 File Type 492 Directory and Filename 493 Cut Copy Paste and Delete 493 Rename 493 Create New Directory 493 Map Network Share Accesses the Map Network Share Settings dialog where you can map one or more network folders See also Chapter 9 8 4 How to Ma...

Page 495: ...n Remote command MMEMory DELete on page 627 MMEMory COPY on page 623 Rename Renames the selected file or directory Remote command MMEMory MOVE on page 627 Create New Directory Creates a folder and opens an edit dialog box to enter name and path absolute or rel ative to the current directory of the new folder Remote command MMEMory MDIRectory on page 627 9 8 2 Map Network Share Settings Access Sele...

Page 496: ... Enter the path of the folder or computer e g IP Address user or server name user Local Folder Enter a letter or an alias name to describe the folder In the directory tree a mapped network folder is indicated as shares Local Folder User Name Enter a user name of a user that has the permission to access the selected network folder Password Enter the password of the selected user Reconnect at Startu...

Page 497: ...Folder Possibly you would like to transfer instrument or user settings to another R S SMBV100B distribute waveform files to several instruments or you have to access frequently the same network drive In these cases on a R S SMBV100B con nected to a LAN you can create a shortcut to this network folder or this computer For information on how to set up a LAN connection refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Setting ...

Page 498: ...ct a In the Network Folder field enter IP Address user or Server Name user For example 10 124 0 170 user b In the Local Folder field enter an alias name e g setups c Enter the User Name and Password of a user with a remote access permis sion to the selected network folder d If necessary enable Reconnect at Startup e Select Connect The selected network folder is mapped to your instrument The list o...

Page 499: ...er on page 491 On an instrument connected to a LAN Via one of the standard functions ftp or SMB samba See Chapter 9 9 2 Accessing the File System of the R S SMBV100B Via ftp on page 499 and Chapter 9 9 3 Accessing the R S SMBV100B File System Via SMB Samba on page 500 Via mapped network drives See Chapter 9 8 4 How to Map a Network Folder on page 495 Via a connected USB storage device See Chapter ...

Page 500: ...ite protection on the file system Enable the corresponding service or interface To enable write permission on the file system 1 Select System Config Setup Security Security General 2 Enable Volatile Mode 3 Enter the Security Password The default password is 123456 For more information see Chapter 10 5 Using the Security Settings on page 535 4 Select System Config Setup Maintenance Shut Down 5 Sele...

Page 501: ... how to set up a LAN connection refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection on page 37 Chapter 11 Network Operation and Remote Control on page 550 To access the file system via ftp We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN 1 Enable file transfer via ftp 2 Enable write permission on the file system 3 On the remote PC start the Windows Explorer 4 In the ad...

Page 502: ...lays the var user test ftp directory 9 9 3 Accessing the R S SMBV100B File System Via SMB Samba The SMB Samba protocol is an alternative way to access the file system of the instru ment from a remote PC This protocol works if both the instrument and the PC are con nected to a LAN For information on how to set up a LAN connection refer to Chapter 2 1 4 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection on page 37...

Page 503: ...the file system 3 On the remote PC start the Windows Explorer Open the Map Network Drive dialog a Select a valid Drive e g W b In the Folder field enter IP Address of the Instrument user or Hostname of the Instrument user For example 10 124 0 166 user or SMBV100B 102030 user Tip The R S SMBV100B indicates its IP address on the screen c Select Finish A log on dialog opens and requests a user name a...

Page 504: ... file with user data to the instrument 1 Connect a USB storage device for example a USB memory stick to one of the USB interfaces of the instrument The R S SMBV100B recognizes the connected USB storage device automatically 2 Enable file transfer via USB 3 Enable write permission on the file system 4 Select Save Rcl The dialog displays the var user directory and the usb drive 5 In the Save Recall d...

Page 505: ...any of the R S SMBV100B you access the file server directly from the File Manager and under the same name e g shares Setups An extra advantage in remote control is that the same application program would control the instruments For example use the remote control command MMEMory CDIRectory shares Setups to set the default directory for mass storage 9 10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings The ...

Page 506: ... 505 Region 505 Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming 506 Path 506 Clear Path 506 Prefix Year Month Day 506 Current Auto Number 507 Automatic Naming If enabled creates the output filenames automatically according to the rules set with the Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming settings Remote command HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO STATe on page 645 File In Automatic Naming Off mode accesses the standard file select ...

Page 507: ...n page 643 Hardcopy Options Common Access select Hardcopy Options Common With the provided settings you can customize the file format and the syntax of the automatically assigned filename Automatic Naming Hardcopy Options Common If enabled creates the output filenames automatically according to the rules set with the Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming settings Remote command HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO ST...

Page 508: ...omatic Naming Deletes all image files with extensions bmp jpg png and xmp in the direc tory set for automatic naming Before the command is executed a warning message prompts you to confirm the dele tion of the files Remote command HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory CLEar on page 644 Prefix Year Month Day Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming Determines the rules for Automatic Naming Per default the automa...

Page 509: ...alue Starting with number 0 the output directory is scanned for existing files As long as files with the same name are existing the number is increased by 1 The num ber is automatically set so that the resulting filename is unique within the selected path The current number is not in the save recall file but is temporarily stored within the database At the following save operation the number is in...

Page 510: ...Close the Hardcopy Options dialog 6 In the Hardcopy dialog select Save The instrument saves a hardcopy of the current instrument display as a jpg file The filename is automatically created 7 To print the hardcopy connect the instrument to a LAN and a Transfer the file to a remote computer as described in Chapter 9 9 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument on page 497 b On the remote compu...

Page 511: ... 2 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration on page 474 At any time you can restore a default configuration to start a measurement at a defined instrument state or set the instrument to factory preset Chapter 13 3 Performing Maintenance Tasks on page 928 Special functions like calibration routines and selftests put your instrument to an initial state Chapter 10 5 Using the Security Settings ...

Page 512: ...ate and time for the system clock see Chapter 13 3 1 Date and Time Set tings on page 929 Configure and activate a Screen Saver Deactivate display update to improve performance see Chapter 10 1 3 Display Update Settings on page 512 Determine the state of the RF signal and the level display in the status bar when you turn on the R S SMBV100B see Chapter 10 1 4 Defining the RF Signal State On Power O...

Page 513: ...ote command DISPlay PSAVe STATe on page 636 Wait Time Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no entries are made Remote command DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff on page 636 Display Adjusts the brightness of the display Increase the value to turn up the display brightness Remote command DISPlay BRIGhtness on page 636 RF Hardkey Adjusts the brightness of the RF on off ke...

Page 514: ...elect System Config Setup User Interface Start Stop Display Update This dialog enables you to deactivate updating the display The remote command to switch off the display update is described in Chapter 12 9 DISPlay Subsystem on page 634 Display Update is Disables the automatic refreshing of the displayed values Remote command DISPlay UPDate on page 637 10 1 4 Defining the RF Signal State On Power ...

Page 515: ...mand OUTPut hw STATe PON on page 647 Display Level as Voltage of EMF Activates display of the signal level as voltage of the EMF no load voltage If disabled the level is displayed as a voltage over a 50 Ohm load Note The setting is not affected by an instrument preset Preset key or RST and the Save Recall function It is reset only by factory preset Remote command SOURce hw POWer EMF STATe on page ...

Page 516: ...ated if no settings are made on the touch screen or via keys or the rotary knob during the selected wait time To activate the screen saver 1 Press the Setup key 2 Select User Interface Display 3 Activate the Screen Saver 4 Define the Wait Time in minutes The instrument turns off the display after the defined period of time 5 To reactivate the display tap the screen or press any key on the front pa...

Page 517: ...100B is always equipped with five User interfaces Additional options are not required 10 2 2 About the Global Connectors Signal to Connector Mapping As described in Chapter 3 4 1 Basics on Signals Modulation Types and Filters Used the Baseband Domain on page 89 the R S SMBV100B uses several internally gen erated and externally supplied signals To handle these signals the R S SMBV100B introduces th...

Page 518: ...the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode on page 310 The Table 10 1 gives an overview of the signals that can be applied to and output at the User connector Table 10 1 Mapping control signals to the User x connectors Connector Direction Assigned Signal Remark User x Input Global Trigger Global Clock Global Next Segment Baseband Sync In Data BER Data BER Clock BER Data Enable BER Restart Option R S SMBV...

Page 519: ... T E L P V status LEDs For quick overview of the source internal external of the control signals the block dia gram displays T E L P V status LEDs on the top bottom of the RF blocks If the RF block is active the displayed information is color coded where A green LED indicates that an external signal is used A yellow LED confirms that the signal is available at the output connector The signal valid...

Page 520: ... selected connector too The eye icon in the tab header indicates the panel front rear or both the selected connector is located at 10 2 3 1 Overview Table Logical Signal Displays the logical signal as configured in the Trigger In Marker or Clock tab of the corresponding digital standard see for example Chapter 3 4 2 1 Trigger Settings on page 110 Connector Displays the assigned connector Configuri...

Page 521: ...l section Global Connector Settings 10 2 4 RF Connectors Settings Access 1 Perform one of the following In the RF block select RF RF Freqeuncy Connectors In the control signal block next to the RF block select T E L P V status LEDs The RF Connectors dialog gives an overview of the mapping of the logical signals to the connectors the displayed connectors depend on the installed options The signal a...

Page 522: ...0 Show Connector 520 Signal Opens the dialog with the corresponding settings Connector Displays the assigned connector Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument 10 2 5 Global Connectors Settings Access 1 Perform one of the following In the Block Diagram select the T M C status LEDs to access the Trigger ...

Page 523: ...or routing and the physical characteristics of the input connectors for trigger clock and control signals 2 Use the built in Show Connector function to display the physical location of the selected connector A blinking LED on the rear panel indicates the selected connector too Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of ...

Page 524: ... multi segment waveform files see Chapter 3 7 Generating Multi Segment Waveform Files on page 193 Baseband Marker 1 2 3 Marker signal output for triggering and control of external devices with user definable marker signals Baseband Sync Out Baseband Sync In Signals available in enabled master slave mode Baseband Sync Out One or more outputs of a dedicated synchronization and trigger signal that ha...

Page 525: ...W Mod Output signal to indicate the output of RF signal in unmodulated form digital modulation is deactivated This control signal is defined in a control list see Chapter 3 5 3 8 Control and Marker Lists Editor on page 130 Triggered Output of the internal or the received external trigger signal Manual Trigger Output of a short pulse signal that can serve as a common external trigger signal for tri...

Page 526: ... command SOURce INPut USER PULM LEVel on page 680 Impedance Clock Trigger Input Selects the input impedance for the external trigger clock inputs Set the value to 1 kΩ GND for high clock rates Remote command SOURce INPut USER TRIGger IMPedance on page 680 SOURce INPut USER CLOCk IMPedance on page 680 Clock Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied clock signal Remo...

Page 527: ...Trigger Marker Clock and the RF Connectors dialog 2 For the corresponding connector select the Find icon The Find Connector dialog opens and displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument A blinking LED on the front rear panel indicates the selected connector too See also Connector status indication on page 517 10 3 Organizing Frequently Used Set...

Page 528: ...the instrument to open a dialog uses this identification Save Recall vs recall setup Sometimes you would like to restore a specific signal generation setup and perform further configurations based on this particular instrument state The R S SMBV100B provides two ways to achieve this by the Save Recall function and by the Recall Setup function Save Recall For a detailed description refer to Chapter...

Page 529: ...onfirms that User Menu with favorites is created d Press the User key The User Menu dialog shows all parameters that you have added to the list You can configure them e g change state or set values as you do in the particular dialog the entry originally appears 4 To remove an entry in select it in the User Menu or in the particular dialog the entry originally appears Open the context menu and sele...

Page 530: ...xisting actions If no actions have been defined the list is empty See Chapter 10 3 3 Assigning Actions to the User Key on page 529 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12 9 DISPlay Subsystem on page 634 Name Enters a user defined name for the action Wizard Defines the action to be executed Load SCPI Script Selecting the action load and executes the SCPI sc...

Page 531: ...n Remote command DISPlay DIALog OPEN on page 638 See also DISPlay DIALog ID on page 638 Add Change Remove Standard functions for managing of the actions Back to Execute Mode Opens the Select Action to Execute dialog Select an Action form the list to execute it To return to the Define User Key Actions dialogs select Select Action to Execute Define Actions Select Action to Execute Define Actions Acc...

Page 532: ...xecute the created action press User In the list of actions Select Action to Execute dialog navigate to the required action In this example this is LTE_ShowTimePlanDL The action is executed The dialog opens 10 4 Managing Licenses and License Keys An option is ready to operate after it is enabled with a license keycode supplied with the option The license key is delivered as a file or on paper Unre...

Page 533: ...d in the R S SMBV100B service manual 10 4 1 Manage License Keys Settings This dialog is the central dialog for licenses registration and performing the required instrument related steps during the process of unregistration Access 1 Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys New License 2 Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys Installed License Ke...

Page 534: ...33 Installed License Keys 533 Show Inactive 533 Show Deactivated 533 Installed License Keys Table 533 Manage Waveform Packages 534 Number of Licenses Waveforms 534 Select Waveform 534 Register Selected Waveform 534 License Table 534 Device ID Displays the instrument specific identification number The device ID is a unique string with the following structure stock number serial number checksum Ente...

Page 535: ... licenses in the Installed License Keys Table See How to Move a Portable License for information on how to activate deactivated licenses Installed License Keys Table Installed License Keys Shows information on the currently installed options Export License Key to File Opens a dialog to save the generated license key file This file is required during the unregistration process If you have a portabl...

Page 536: ...umber of Licenses Waveforms Manage Waveform Packages Displays the number of the available and used R S SMBVB K200 licenses Select Waveform Manage Waveform Packages Opens a standard dialog to select the waveform to be registered Register Selected Waveform Manage Waveform Packages Executes the registration License Table Manage Waveform Packages Gives an overview of the registered waveforms the regis...

Page 537: ... deactivation key Save it to file 6 On the source instrument select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys New Licences Import License Keys from File Select the transferred deactivation key 7 On the source instrument select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys New Licences Export Deactivation Response to File 8 In the browser go to Manage Licenses Move P...

Page 538: ...y internal use Security The security concept of the R S SMBV100B helps you to protect your instrument against uncontrolled access and changes All provided security services require that you enter the security password Provided security services are General security parameters such as USB storage that secures controlled access to the mass memory of the instru ment Volatile mode that prevents inform...

Page 539: ... R S SMBV100B Instrument Security Proce dures 10 5 1 Protection Level Settings Access Select System Config Setup Security Protection The Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of different protection lev els Several functions in the instrument are password protected to prevent for example accidental changes Protection on page 536 The remote commands required to unlock a protected stage...

Page 540: ...he mass memory and manual operation All modified settings in this dialog are not applied until you enter the Security Password and confirm with Accept 10 5 2 1 Update Policy Security Settings Access Select System Config Setup Security Security General SW Update The SW Update tab enables you to select the security mode for firmware updates The remote commands available to control security settings ...

Page 541: ...crepancies the instrument issues a warn ing message You can still update the firmware or reject updating This setting also enables you to downgrade the firmware version All Packages Accepts all packages without signature verification R S Signed Packages Performs the signature check If the check detects any discrepancies the instrument issues a warn ing message and locks the update to this firmware...

Page 542: ...cted external storage device such as a memory stick To activate volatile mode enter the security password confirm with Accept and reboot the instrument Otherwise the change has no effect Activated volatile mode is indicated by an icon Remote command SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe on page 897 Sanitize Executes the erase procedure that sanitizes the internal memory If the instrument is subject to hig...

Page 543: ...mote command DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency on page 637 Annotation Amplitude Enables the display of the currently selected level in the status bar To apply the change enter the security password and confirm with Accept Otherwise the change has no effect Remote command DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude on page 637 User Interface Allows you to lock the controls for manual operation and the display individu...

Page 544: ...changes This security feature protects the instrument against unauthorized access but still shows the current settings and processes for exam ple when you operate the instrument via remote control The function disables The touchscreen functionality of the display The keys at the front panel of the instrument The external mouse and keyboard The instrument indicates the locked controls by a padlock ...

Page 545: ...e inserting the password Enter the security password 123456 In remote control mode send the command SYST ULOC ENABled to release all locks at once Alternatively Send the command SYST KLOC OFF to unlock the keyboard and touchscreen Send the command SYST DLOC OFF to release all locks Via remote control there is no password required Remote command SYSTem ULOCk on page 895 SYSTem DLOCk on page 895 SYS...

Page 546: ...ocol for secure data communication HTTP Activates access via HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol the appli cation protocol for hypermedia information systems FTP Activates access via FTP File Transfer Protocol used to transfer files from a host to the instrument and vice versa See also Chapter 9 9 2 Accessing the File System of the R S SMBV100B Via ftp on page 499 SMB Samba Activates access to SMB S...

Page 547: ...ity password is entered and correct 10 5 4 Password Management Access 1 Select System Config Setup Security Security Password Management User Password In this tab you can assign the security and a user defined password 2 Select System Config Setup Security Security Password Management Security Password Using the Security Settings ...

Page 548: ...ss select System Config Setup Security Security Password Management User Password Allows you to change and confirm the user password Old Password User Password Enters the current user password The default password is instrument Note We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network New Password User Password Enters the new user password The security pa...

Page 549: ...n contain decimal characters only Confirm Password Security Password Confirms the new security password by repeating Note The new password is not assigned until you select Change Password button Change Password Security Password Changes the password accordingly 10 6 Undoing or Restoring Actions Undo is a function that removes the effect of the last action on the instrument and reverts it to an old...

Page 550: ...te Enables the recording of the performed actions History List Lists the performed actions provided Undo Redo state is On Clear History Deletes the recorded list of the performed steps Apply Performs the Undo Redo If you select a previously performed action of the list all subsequent actions are undone The list entries remain If you select a subsequently executed action you can restore all the act...

Page 551: ...ent from the standby to the ready state or vice versa In remote operation from a remote computer or in manual control there is another possibility to shut down the instrument or to reboot the system Access Select System Config Setup Maintenance Shut down Remote control commands SYSTem REBoot on page 912 SYSTem SHUTdown on page 913 Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument ...

Page 552: ...00B also from a remote location The Figure 11 1 shows the possibilities of the physical connection interfaces for the remote access Figure 11 1 Supported remote connections For information on how to configure a network see the Chapter 2 1 4 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection on page 37 The various interfaces provide flexible access to the instrument such as remote con trol remote operation or rem...

Page 553: ...on platform technology VNC Virtual Network Computing The protocol allows simultaneous operation from several remote devices and the instrument nevertheless remains locally operable The GUI is visible To perform the settings you can operate the instrument as with the manual control Clients supporting remote operation depend on the used remote device see Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Supported VNC operation...

Page 554: ... communication Raw Ethernet simple Telnet TCPIP host address LAN device name port SOCKET VISA or socket controller The LAN connector is on the rear panel of the instrument The interface is based on TCP IP and supports various protocols For a description of the protocols refer to Chapter 11 2 1 2 HiSLIP Protocol on page 555 Chapter 11 2 1 3 VXI 11 Protocol on page 555 Chapter 11 2 1 4 Socket Commun...

Page 555: ...it assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers For more information see also Chapter A 1 Additional Basics on Remote Control on page 953 11 2 1 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols For remote control via a netw...

Page 556: ... characteristics of the VISA resource strings for the corre sponding interface protocols The highlighted characters are crucial HiSLIP hislip0 HiSLIP device name designates that the interface protocol HiSLIP is used mandatory hislip0 is composed of HiSLIP device name HiSLIP port and must be assigned For details of the HiSLIP protocol refer to Chapter 11 2 1 2 HiSLIP Protocol on page 555 VXI 11 ins...

Page 557: ... successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested com mand but is delivered to the TCP IP buffers For more information see also the application note 1MA208 Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP 11 2 1 3 VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call proto...

Page 558: ...asurement Cass Specification is a protocol that is built on top of USB for communication with USB devices like GPIB It defines class code infor mation of the instrument that identifies its functionality to load the respective device driver Using VISA library it supports service request triggers and other specific oper ations similar to GPIB 11 2 2 1 USB Resource String The resource string represen...

Page 559: ...iting or triggering Notes and characteristics In connection with the GPIB interface note the following Up to 15 instruments can be connected The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number of devices whichever is less The maximum recommended cable length between two instruments is 2 m A wired OR connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel s...

Page 560: ...A resource string or by an appropriately defined VISA alias short name See also Table 11 2 for an overview Instrument access via VXI 11 or HiSLIP protocols is achieved from high level program ming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA encapsulates the low level VXI or GPIB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user A VISA installation is...

Page 561: ...f Rohde Schwarz Signal Generators Remote control application program using VISA Figure 11 3 Application program using VISA Protocol Remote control program Socket viOpen TCPIP SMBV100B 102030 5025 SOCKET viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n VXI 11 viOpen TCPIP SMBV100B 102030 inst0 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n HiSLIP viOpen TCPIP SMBV100B 102030 hislip0 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n USBTMC viOpen USB 0x0...

Page 562: ...1 rssmbv_init TCPIP SMBV100B 102030 inst0 INSTR rssmbv_SetFrequency 2e9 HiSLIP rssmbv_init TCPIP SMBV100B 102030 hislip0 INSTR rssmbv_SetFrequency 2e9 USBTMC rssmbv_init USB 0x0AAD 0x01df 100001 INSTR rssmbv_SetFrequency 2e9 GPIB rssmbv_init GPIB 28 INSTR rssmbv_SetFrequency 2e9 Remote control program using instrument driver VISA not available Figure 11 5 Remote control program using instrument dr...

Page 563: ...g the command scripts used The R S SMBV100B also covers command sets of Rohde Schwarz signal genera tors To achieve optimal compatibility when replacing an instrument we recommend that you select the emulation command set for the corresponding signal generator You find all the remote control command sets supported by the R S SMBV100B in a selection list The selected instrument also defines the ide...

Page 564: ...stem Config Remote Access Network In the Network dialog you can configure the settings of the general network envi ronment and specific identification parameters of the instrument in the network The remote commands required to configure the network remotely are described in Chapter 12 17 SYSTem Subsystem on page 889 How to connect the signal generator to the network is described in the Chapter 2 1...

Page 565: ... recommend that you do not change the default network settings or the host name to avoid problems with the network connection If you change the hostname be sure to use a unique name Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname on page 900 Workgroup Sets the individual windows workgroup name of the R S SMBV100B This parameter is required in case the instrument is integrated in a window...

Page 566: ...anually select Address Mode Static Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK on page 901 Default Gateway Displays the gateway address This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network To assign the gateway address manually select Address Mode Static Remote command SYSTem COMMunicat...

Page 567: ...cess Select System Config Remote Access Visa Resource Strings The Visa Resource String dialog displays the Visa resource strings provided for remote control via the different interfaces Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource on page 898 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource on page 899 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource on page 903 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RESource on page 898 SYSTem COMMu...

Page 568: ...rial crossover null modem cable A USB connection requires the Visa library to be installed on the controller Visa detects and configures the R S SMBV100B automatically when the USB connection is established Access Select System Config Remote Access RS232 In the RS232 dialog you can configure the settings of the serial interface The remote commands required to configure the settings remotely are de...

Page 569: ...nother signal generator The remote commands required to configure the emulation settings remotely are described in Chapter 12 17 SYSTem Subsystem on page 889 Language Selects the instrument whose remote command set is emulated by the R S SMBV100B Remote command SYSTem LANGuage on page 905 Mode Selects the way the instrument identification is performed Automatic Sets the IDN String and the OPT Stri...

Page 570: ...your own identification string so that each generator uses an individual identification like My_SigGen for instance see Mode Remote command IDN on page 612 SYSTem IRESponse on page 904 OPT String Indicates the option string of the instrument as queried with common command OPT In Mode User Defined you can define your own option string additionally to the automatically created one Remote command OPT...

Page 571: ...kbar Displays the currently active connections in the taskbar SCPI Connections Shows the active VISA resource string of the interface via which the instrument is remotely controlled Remote command n a TCP IP Connections Shows the type and client address of the LAN interface connection Remote command n a 11 4 7 QR Code Access Select System Config Remote Access QR Code Remote Access Settings ...

Page 572: ...eration from a Smart Device on page 602 11 5 LXI Settings On the R S SMBV100B the LXI functionality is already installed and enabled see LXI Status Settings Thus the instrument can be accessed via any web browser like the Microsoft Internet Explorer to perform the following tasks Modifying network configurations Remote control the instrument Performing SCPI remote diagnostics The LAN settings are ...

Page 573: ...1 5 2 1 LAN Configuration on page 573 LAN Status The LED indicates the LXI status green Normal operation green flashing Device identification red LAN fault Hostname MAC Address IP Address See Hostname on page 563 LAN Reset Initiates the network configuration reset mechanism for the instrument and resets the hostname MAC address and IP address According to the LXI standard a LAN reset must place th...

Page 574: ...lays the device information required by the LXI stan dard including the VISA resource string in read only format Device Indicator activates or deactivates the LXI status indication When activated the LXI LEDs flash both in the browser dialog and in the LXI dialog of the connected instrument see LAN Status A green LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established a red sym bol ...

Page 575: ...r modification It comprises the following navigation entries IP Configuration 573 Advanced Config 574 Ping Client 575 SCPI Remote Trace 575 Data Sheet 576 IP Configuration The IP configuration web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification The IP Address Mode selects a configuration mode for the IP address of the instru ment With static configuration the entered IP ad...

Page 576: ...onal protocols multicast DNS and DNS service discovery are used for device communication in zero configuration networks working without DNS and DHCP ICMP Ping Must be enabled to use the ping utility If you disable this setting the instrument does not answer ping requests The set ting does not affect the LXI ping client You can ping other hosts from the instru ment even if the setting is disabled V...

Page 577: ... reply packets this function checks whether the communication with a device via LAN is working Ping is useful for the diagnosis of IP network or router failures To initiate a ping at the instrument 1 On the Ping Client page enter the IP address of the host in the Destination Address field for example 10 113 1 151 2 Select Submit SCPI Remote Trace The remote trace functionality allows you to trace ...

Page 578: ...ear deletes all message log entries in the database and at the screen Details displays details of the selected message for example an SCPI command in hex format also possible by double clicking a message Columns The following columns are available if no column filter is applied Rec record number of the message within the message log I number of the subinstrument MT indicates the type of the messag...

Page 579: ...anges and information of the data sheet for example important as reference values for recalibration 11 6 How to Find the VISA Resource String Select System Config Remote Access VISA Resource Strings The dialog shows all specified resource strings of the supported remote control interfaces How to Find the VISA Resource String ...

Page 580: ...nd 30 Risk of losing remote connection If the remote access and network settings had been configured to values different to the default executing a factory preset via remote control terminates the connection to the instrument 11 8 How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection This section guides you through the steps required to set up remote control connec tions of the available interfaces Chapter 11...

Page 581: ...ction over the LXI Browser Interface Via the LXI browser interface to the R S SMBV100B one or more users can control the instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation Most instru ment controls are available via the front panel simulation File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available Starting a remote control via the LXI web browser This s...

Page 582: ... resource string also referred to as address string A VISA alias short name is used to replace the complete resource string The host address is the R S SMBV100B s hostname or its IP address See also Chapter 11 2 1 LAN Interface on page 553 In the following we assume that A LAN remote control link between the controller and the R S SMBV100B is set up The R S VISA program is installed on the remote ...

Page 583: ...he menu bar select Find Resource to search for the instrument in the LAN 5 Select VXI 11 and Find Resources R S VISA scans the network for connected instruments and lists all detected instruments in the Resource list Note The search may take some time particularly in large networks 6 Select the required instrument and confirm with Select How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection ...

Page 584: ... and R S VISA indicates the IP address in the Resource field of the main application window 7 As an alternative to the IP address you can assign an alias name to the R S SMBV100B a In the menu bar select RsVisaConfig b In the toolbar select to access the VISA Resource String Composer How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection ...

Page 585: ...esponses Note If the connection cannot be set up R S VISA displays an error in the log view For information on how to proceed when network failures occur see Chapter 14 5 Resolving Network Connection Failures on page 950 For further information on the functions to read and write to an open session and the utility applications the software provides see the R S VISA user manual Starting a remote con...

Page 586: ...ct Write To check the performed setting SOUR1 FREQ and select Query The instrument response is 4000000000 The value corresponds to the frequency in Hz While remote control is active the Remote icon in the status bar indicates that the instrument is in remote control mode Currently ongoing communication data transfer is indicated by green colored arrows in the icon Operating via the front and touch...

Page 587: ... transmits information unencrypted Therefore for sensitive information we recommend that you use a client which supports secure protocols like SSH In the following example we assume basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller You can find information on the interface commands in the corre sponding manuals Setting up a Telnet connection To control the software only a Telnet progr...

Page 588: ...ver GPIB The program example in this section is written in VISUAL BASIC A condition for pro gramming in VISUAL BASIC is that the modules NIGLOBAL Niglobal bas and VBIB32 Vbib_32 bas are added to the projects Drivers for instrument for example IVI COM and LabVIEW drivers are available for download area on the product page at https www rohde schwarz com driver smbv100b Starting a remote control sess...

Page 589: ...ISA detects and configures the R S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established You do not have to enter an address string or install a separate driver Starting a remote control session over USB 1 Connect instrument and controller using USB cable Switch them on 2 Execute the following commands on the controller a Open the port to the instrument viOpen USB 0x0AAD 0x01df 100001 IN...

Page 590: ...ostics functionality will be extended in later releases e g to down load or upload SCPI command files from to the instrument 11 10 How to Return to Manual Operation Before returning to manual control command processing must be completed Other wise the instrument switches back to remote control immediately 1 To return from Remote state to manual state perform one of the following On the controller ...

Page 591: ...d windows On the contrary even active window con trol open close is possible Figure 11 6 Steps for performing SCPI Scripts In the graph you can see the main steps required to work with an SCPI script Creating a SCPI list With the SCPI record functions you can create a SCPI command list directly in the instrument and then export the list to the controller If you want to edit or write a script manua...

Page 592: ...rent setting see Chap ter 11 11 1 Show SCPI Command on page 591 Some parameters cannot be set by an SCPI command If so no SCPI command found is entered instead of a command when you record or generate all settings at once The difference between Show SCPI Command and the provided cross refer ence If you want to enter your settings in a script or use a remote control program you must know the corres...

Page 593: ... 1GP60 MATLAB Toolkit for R S Signal Generators NICVI An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements and tests c You can directly use this format with National Instruments LabWindows CVI You can also convert a script to a user specific format In this case you need a code template with the extension expcodetmpl For information on how to select the code template and save the script in a...

Page 594: ...exported the script to a file Select SCPI Recording Export Show file content See Chapter 11 11 3 SCPI Recording Export Settings on page 592 The SCPI Recording List shows the last recorded and exported commands SCPI Recording List Lists the automatically or manually recorded recorded SCPI commands Export Opens the SCPI Recording Export dialog for configuring the file parameters for export Remove Al...

Page 595: ...cesses the predefined templates for common source code genera tors that convert the recorded settings in the programming languages MATLAB or NICVI User Code Generator Provides the ability to convert a script by a user specific code genera tor Select Code Template Opens the standard File Select dialog and lists the predefined or user defined code templates See Chapter 9 5 1 File Select Settings on ...

Page 596: ...th the Copy function you can conveniently paste the command including the current setting e g in a command script 11 13 How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding to the Manual Operation Using the Online Help If you are looking for the remote command to a function in manual operation you find it in the description of the online help 1 To find out the SCPI command of a parameter in manual opera...

Page 597: ...ion on a Fingertip 1 On the screen open the context sensitive menu touch and hold or right mouse click and select Start SCPI recording Starting from now all steps you perform are recorded 2 To stop SCPI recording select context sensitive menu Stop SCPI recording The SCPI Recording List dialog opens automatically 3 Proceed with How to check an SCPI list How to record SCPI lists manually We recommen...

Page 598: ... d Continue with the next setting and repeat steps a to b whenever needed Each time you select Add SCPI the SCPI command is appended to a tempo rary list 3 To check the progress of the recording select Context Sensitive Show SCPI Recording List The SCPI Recording List dialog opens displaying all recorded settings so far 4 Proceed with How to check an SCPI list How to create a SCPI list with the cu...

Page 599: ...ument writes all SCPI commands of the key parameters and the modified settings in the file Also assigns the file extension automatically according to the source code format 6 To preview the content of the SCPI list a Select Save Rcl b Select Operation Mode SCPI Export c In the var user directory select a previously saved file d Select Show SCPI List The list of all SCPI commands is displayed for e...

Page 600: ...h and remove missing command entries 2 Remove unnecessary content written after a preset 3 Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order If you for example set a STATe command to the last position of a list you can avoid intermediate calculations of the signal 4 Preview the list for completeness by comparing it with the modified settings in the manual mode a To retrace your settings in manual opera...

Page 601: ...the File Content section 11 16 How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC This section shows you some examples of the various possibilities to set up remote operation Using a desktop system Chapter 11 16 1 1 Using a Web Browser on page 599 Chapter 11 16 1 2 Using a VNC Client Software on page 600 Using a smart device Chapter 11 16 2 1 Using a VNC App on page 603 Chapter 11 16 2 2 Using a Web Browser w...

Page 602: ...talled manually Various free of charge programs such as Ultr VNC or similar VNC client programs are available for download on the Internet Setting up the VNC connection on a Linux Unix desktop client 1 Start a web browser on the remote computer Enter the IP address of the instru ment 2 Enter the following address vnc IP address of the instrument for example vnc 10 113 1 151 A dialog opens requesti...

Page 603: ...played and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer Terminating VNC connection Perform one of the following a On an external Unix Linux PC close the Internet browser or the signal genera tor window b On an external Windows PC close the VNC viewer program The connection is terminated but not disabled It can be established again any time In the Active Connections tab the disp...

Page 604: ...built up and some essen tial configuration steps For comprehensive information on this topic refer to the application notes 1MA216 Remote Operation of Windows Based Instruments with Apple iPad 7BM82 Apple iPad Remote Control of Broadcasting T M Instruments Example Figure 11 7 Example of a network configuration for remote operation with a smart device As shown in the figure the R S SMBV100B and the...

Page 605: ... SMBV100B and their configuration in the LAN 2 Configure the WLAN router according to the manufacturer s instructions 3 Install the required VNC App on your smart device 4 On the smart device start the VNC App 5 In the address field enter the IP address of the instrument Tip The R S SMBV100B indicates IP address on the screen A log on dialog opens and requests the password for the VNC connection T...

Page 606: ...t s IP address or access the instrument with the Safari web browser QR code readers are available from various manufacturers of the smart devices The list of supported devices is different according to the smart device Refer to the manu facturer s website to find out whether a reader is available for your device and how it is installed 1 Install the required QR code reader software on your device ...

Page 607: ...d by a common LAN imple mentation including an ICMP ping responder for diagnostics The instrument can be configured via a web browser A LAN Configuration Initialize LCI mechanism resets the LAN configuration The instrument also supports automatic detection in a LAN via the VXI 11 discovery protocol and programming by IVI drivers In addition the R S SMBV100B provides the following LXI related funct...

Page 608: ...th no SCPI command available A parameter is accessed with PARAMETER EXIT_CODE_START EXIT_CODE_END Closes the visa session All entries between start and end are written once at the end of the output file Templates are created in ASCII format with file extension expcodetempl Example Example to the code generator template NICVI expcodetmpl EXTENSION_START c EXTENSION_END INIT_CODE_START include ansi_...

Page 609: ...NIT_CODE_END COMMAND_CODE_START write_command COMMAND COMMAND_CODE_END NO_COMMAND_CODE_START no SCPI command available for parameter PARAMETER NO_COMMAND_CODE_END EXIT_CODE_START viClose handle viClose defaultRM return 0 EXIT_CODE_END 11 17 3 Remote Control States How to I recognize if there is an active remote connection to the instrument Observe the indication on the taskbar A softkey in the tas...

Page 610: ...p the Remote icon display Local front panel or key emulation A currently performed setting is indicated by the green arrows The setting must be completed white arrows other wise the instrument remains in remote state LLO controller Remote control with locked front panel keys to prevent user interaction The parameters are in read only mode You can unlock LLO and thus return to manual operation only...

Page 611: ... required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R S SMBV100B follow the SCPI syntax rules Asynchronous...

Page 612: ...orresponding sections of the same title provide simple programming examples for the R S SMBV100B The purpose of the examples is to present all commands for a given task In real applications one would rather reduce the examples to an appropri ate subset of commands The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an environment for the development and execution of remot...

Page 613: ...1 IDN 612 IST 612 OPC 612 OPT 612 PRE 613 PSC 613 RCL 613 RST 613 SAV 614 SRE 614 STB 614 TRG 614 TST 615 WAI 615 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event ...

Page 614: ...g on page 568 IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values ISTflag 0 1 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query writes a 1 into the ou...

Page 615: ...e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RCL Number Recall Load...

Page 616: ...ngs in a file use the command MMEMory STORe STATe Manual operation See Save Immediate x on page 484 SRE Contents Service request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range ...

Page 617: ...mmand is provided for each digital standard These specific commands are described in the associated subsystems Four presetting actions are available Activating the default state of all internal instrument functions RST on page 613 Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g GPIB address or reference oscillator source settings Activating the...

Page 618: ... settings that are related to signal path Usage Event SYSTem PRESet Triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as The Preset key The RST command For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function see Table 9 1 Example SYST PRES All instrument settings also the settings that are not currently active are reset to their default values Usage Setting only SYSTem FPReset Triggers a...

Page 619: ...t storage location The R S SMBV100B stores user data in the user directory Depending on the installed options the user directory is physically located on the inter nal memory or on the removable memory In the file system user directory is always indicated as var user In manual control you access this directory via the File Manager see Chapter 9 8 Using the File Manager on page 491 In remote contro...

Page 620: ...ommand MMEM CDIR are used for the path and drive setting in the com mands 12 6 2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory For better overview and easy file handling you may not save all user files in the user directory var user but rater organize them into subdirectories The command syntax defines two general ways to access files with user data in a spe cific directory Change the...

Page 621: ...atically SOURce1 BB DM SETTing STORe dmSettings SOURce1 BB DM SETTing DELete dmSavRcl SOURce1 BB DM SETTing LOAD SaveRecallTest SOURce1 BB DM SETTing CATalog SaveRecallTest dmSettings Example Load file with user data from a specific directory This example shows how to use the custom digital modulation commands to set the data source and select a data list Working with other list files like control...

Page 622: ...y STORe STATe 4 var user savrcl settings savrcltxt store the settings in a file in the default directory set the default directory specify only the file name MMEMory CDIRectory var user savrcl SAV 4 MMEMory STORe STATe 4 settings savrcltxt Load the stored settings in the intermediate memory 4 and activate them MMEMory LOAD STATe 4 var user settings savrcltxt RCL 4 Example Working with files and di...

Page 623: ...settings savrcltxt var user new settings savrcltxt Rename the file settings savrcltxt into the new directory and read out the files in this specific directory MMEMory CDIRectory var user new MMEMory MOVE settings savrcltxt settings_new savrcltxt MMEMory CATalog var user new 25141 8102789120 DIR 4096 DIR 4096 settings_new savrcltxt BIN 16949 Delete the test directory MMEMory RDIRectory var user tes...

Page 624: ...rs path string String parameter to specify the directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory The path may be relative or absolute Return values UsedDiskSpace Byte size of all files in the directory FreeDiskSpace Remaining disk space in bytes FileInfo NameFileN SuffixFileN SizeFileN List of files separated by commas NameFileN ...

Page 625: ...ory use two dots Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Directory File List and Filename on page 483 MMEMory COPY SourceFile DestinationFile Copies an existing file to a new file Instead of just a file this command can also be used to copy a complete directory together with all its files Setting parameters SourceFile string String containing the path and file name of the source file Destination...

Page 626: ...ry DATA var user test txt 15hallo Writes the block data to the file test txt The digit 1 indicates a length entry of one digit the digit 5 indi cate a length of the binary data hallo in bytes MMEMory DATA var user test txt Sends the data of the file test txt from the instrument to the controller in the form of a binary block Response 15hallo Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DATA UNPRotected Msus Data ...

Page 627: ...its Length M0M1 Mx MN 1 Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part I0Q0 IxQx IN 1QN 1 Binary data in ASCII format IxQx represents binary data 16 bit signed integer in 2 s com plement notation containing the I and Q component alternately and starting...

Page 628: ... BB ARBitrary WAVeform CLOCk var user wave wv 1 1E6 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary WAVeform CLOCk var user wave wv MMEMory DCATalog path Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory Query parameters path String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the content of the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values Catalog file_ent...

Page 629: ...ber to be used with the RCL command e g RCL 4 file_name String parameter to specify the file name with extension savrcltxt Usage Setting only Manual operation See Recall on page 484 MMEMory MDIRectory Directory Creates a subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory If no direc tory is specified a subdirectory is created in the default directory This command can also be used to c...

Page 630: ...ry from the mass memory storage system If no directory is specified the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory Setting parameters Directory string String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted Usage Event MMEMory STORe STATe savrcl_state_nr file_name Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file The instrument setting must first be stored i...

Page 631: ...ffix Value range Description CALibration hw 1 Optional suffix Understanding the query response 0 error free execution of the adjustments 1 indicates that an error occurred the process has been canceled CALibration ALL MEASure 629 CALibration hw ALL DATE 630 CALibration hw ALL INFormation 630 CALibration hw ALL TEMP 630 CALibration hw ALL TIME 631 CALibration DATA FACTory DATE 631 CALibration hw CO...

Page 632: ...ALL DATE 2016 01 01 Usage Query only Manual operation See Last Full Adjustment on page 935 CALibration hw ALL INFormation Queries the current state of the internal adjustment Return values CalInfoText string Example CAL ALL INF Instrument is calibrated no adjustment required UNCAL instrument is warming up UNCAL Please perform full adjustment after warming up UNCAL Please perform full adjustment Us...

Page 633: ...on See Time Since Last Full Adjustment on page 935 CALibration DATA FACTory DATE Queries the date of the last factory calibration Return values Date string Example CAL DATA FACT DATE 2016 01 01 Usage Query only Manual operation See Last Factory Calibration on page 942 CALibration hw CONTinueonerror State Continues the calibration even though an error was detected By default adjustments are aborted...

Page 634: ... Modulator Current Frequency on page 279 12 8 DIAGnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and servicing SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands the commands lis ted here are all device specific All DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not affected by RST The test functions are intended for services purposes They are thus passwo...

Page 635: ...c hw BGINfo CATalog 633 DIAGnostic hw BGINfo 633 DIAGnostic hw POINt CATalog 634 DIAGnostic hw MEASure POINt 634 DIAGnostic hw BGINfo CATalog Queries the names of the assemblies available in the instrument Return values Catalog string List of all assemblies the values are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration Example See Exampl...

Page 636: ...mation see R S SMBV100B Service Manual Return values Catalog string List of comma separated values each representing a test point Example See Example Programming example on page 633 Usage Query only DIAGnostic hw MEASure POINt Name Triggers the voltage measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured voltage For more information see R S SMBV100B Service Manual Query parameters Name...

Page 637: ...ning and closing dialogs Use the following commands to query the dialog IDs of all currently open dialogs The dialog ID is a prerequisite for opening and closing dialogs via the remote control The dialog ID is also required to define user key actions See Chapter 10 3 3 Assigning Actions to the User Key on page 529 Query the dialog IDs of all open dialogs DISPlay DIALog ID CEUtraDLGenSetDlg _ A Dlg...

Page 638: ...y We recommend that you use this mode to protect the display if you operate the instru ment in remote control To define the wait time use the command DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 0 Example See Example Activating screen saver mode and display update on page 635 Manual operation See Screen Saver on page 511 DISPlay BRIGhtness BRIGhtness Sets the brightness...

Page 639: ...Litude State Indicates asterisks instead of the level values in the status bar Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 1 Example See Example Activating screen saver mode and display update on page 635 Manual operation See Annotation Amplitude on page 541 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency State Indicates asterisks instead of the frequency values in the status bar Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON R...

Page 640: ...rmation mandatory input parameter for the com mands DISPlay DIALog OPEN on page 638 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe on page 639 Optional parts String of X values where X is a character interpreted as follows q DialogQualifier optional dialog qualifier usually the letter A or B as displayed in the dialog title i Instances comma separated list of instance indexes given in the order h c s d g u 0 Default is zer...

Page 641: ...query DISPlay DIALog ID The DialogName part of the query result is sufficient Example See Example Querying the dialog IDs opening and closing dia logs on page 635 Usage Setting only DISPlay DIALog CLOSe ALL Closes all open dialogs Example See Example Querying the dialog IDs opening and closing dia logs on page 635 Usage Event 12 10 FORMat Subsystem The commands in the FORMat subsystem determine th...

Page 642: ...es the numeric format for responses of the status register Parameters Format ASCii BINary HEXadecimal OCTal ASCii Returns the register content as a decimal number BINary HEXadecimal OCTal Returns the register content either as a binary hexadecimal or octal number According to the selected format the number starts with B binary H hexadecimal or O octal RST ASCii Example FORM SREG HEX returns the re...

Page 643: ...xecute a hard copy to an automatic named file HCOPy DEVice LANGuage PNG HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO STATe 1 defines the output format sets the instrument to automatically create output file names Configure hard copy options set automatic naming rules An automatically generated file name consists of Prefix YYYY MM DD Number Format HCOPy DEVice LANGuage BMP defines output format bmp HCOPy REGion DIALog sel...

Page 644: ... following commands you can configure the settings of a hard copy HCOPy DATA 642 HCOPy IMAGe FORMat 642 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 642 HCOPy REGion 643 HCOPy FILE NAME 643 HCOPy EXECute 643 HCOPy DATA Transfers the hard copy data directly as a NByte stream to the remote client Return values Data block data Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 641 Usage Query only HCOPy IMAGe FOR...

Page 645: ...g Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 641 Manual operation See File on page 504 HCOPy EXECute Generates a hard copy of the current display The output destination is a file Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 641 Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 505 12 11 2 Automatic Naming Use the following commands to automatically assign a file name ...

Page 646: ...Directory string RST var user Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 641 Manual operation See Path on page 506 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory CLEar Deletes all files with extensions bmp jpg png and xpm in the directory set for automatic naming Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 641 Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Path on page 506 HCOPy FILE NA...

Page 647: ...1 OFF ON RST 1 Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 641 Manual operation See Prefix Year Month Day on page 506 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE NUMBer Queries the number that is used as part of the file name for the next hard copy in auto matic mode At the beginning the count starts at 0 The R S SMBV100B searches the specified output directory for the highest number in the stored ...

Page 648: ...out 646 KBOard LAYout Layout Selects the language for an external keyboard and assigns the keys acccordingly Parameters Layout CHINese DANish DUTCh DUTBe ENGLish ENGUK FINNish FRENch FREBe FRECa GERMan ITALian JAPanese KORean NORWegian PORTuguese RUSSian SPANish SWEDish ENGUS RST n a factory preset ENGLish Example KBOard LAYout US activates American keyboard Manual operation See USB Keyboard Layou...

Page 649: ...e RF output signal of the instrument Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 0 Example OUTPut ALL STATe 0 OUTPut hw STATe State Activates the RF output signal Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example OUTP ON Activates the RF output Manual operation See RF State RF ON on page 288 OUTPut hw STATe PON Pon Defines the state of the RF output signal when the instrument is switched on Paramet...

Page 650: ... position RST AUTO Example SOURce POWer ALC STATe 1 OUTPut AMODe FIXed Manual operation See Mode on page 376 OUTPut hw IMPedance Queries the impedance of the RF outputs Return values Impedance G1K G50 G10K RST G50 Example OUTP IMP queries the impedance of RF output Response 50 the impedance is 50 ohms Usage Query only Manual operation See RF output impedance on page 288 OUTPut hw AFIXed RANGe LOWe...

Page 651: ...circuit of the RF output Usage Event Manual operation See Overload on page 377 OUTPut hw PROTection TRIPped Queries the state of the protective circuit Return values Tripped 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example OUTP PROT TRIP queries the state of the protective circuit of the RF output Response 0 the protective circuit has not tripped Usage Query only Manual operation See Overload on page 377 12 14 SENSe READ...

Page 652: ...er Use the SLISt commands to change the sensor mapping READ ch 1 to 4 Sensor assignment INIate hw 1 to 4 Sensor assignment ELEMent ch 1 to 25 Sensor mapping list Programming examples Example Detecting and assigning a power sensor SLISt LIST Response NRP33SN V 900007 USB Legacy NRP Z211 900001 USB Legacy list of automatically detected sensors SLISt SCAN STATe 1 searches for sensors connected in the...

Page 653: ...de SENSe1 FILTer NSRatio 0 02 DB Sets the maximum noise component in the result to 0 02 DB SENSe1 FILTer NSRatio MTIMe 10 Limits the settling time to 10 seconds SENSe1 APERture DEFault STATe 0 Deactivates the default aperture time of the sensor SENSe1 APERture TIMe 10e 6 Sets the aperture time to 10 us SENSe1 UNIT DBM Selects unit dBm for the measured value INITiate CONTinuous ON Switches the cont...

Page 654: ...Vice 661 SENSe ch POWer SVERsion 661 SENSe ch POWer TYPE 661 SENSe ch POWer ZERO 662 SLISt LIST Returns a list of all detected sensors in a comma separated string Return values SensorList String of comma separated entries Each entry contains information on the sensor type serial num ber and interface The order of the entries does not correspond to the order the sensors are displayed in the NRP Sen...

Page 655: ...s all R S NRP power sensors connected in the LAN or via USBTMC protocol Setting parameters SensorId string Mapping enum Example See Example Detecting and assigning a power sensor on page 650 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Sensor Mapping List on page 395 INITiate hw POWer CONTinuous Continuous Switches the local state of the continuous power measurement by R S NRP power sensors on and off ...

Page 656: ...lue Example SENS1 UNIT DBM Selects unit dBm for presentation of measurement result READ1 Queries the measurement result of the sensor 45 6246576745440230 45 6 dBm were measured at the given frequency Example R S NRP Z81 READ1 55 62403263352178 22 419472478812476 55 6 dBm is the measured average level 22 4 dBm is the measured peak Usage Query only Manual operation See Level Peak Level Average on pa...

Page 657: ...float Range depends on connected power sensor Increment 1E 9 RST depends on connected power sensor Example See Example Performing a power measurement with a fixed fil ter on page 651 Manual operation See Aperture Time on page 402 SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice SELect Select Several S parameter tables can be stored in a sensor The command selects a loaded data set for S parameter correction for...

Page 658: ...r for permanent display Parameters Priority AVERage PEAK RST AVERage Example SENS1 DISP PERM STAT ON The permanent viewer is switched on SENS1 DISP PERM PRI AVER The measured average power is indicated SENSe ch POWer DISPlay PERManent STATe State Activates the permanent display of the measured power level results The instrument also indicates the sensor type the connection the measurement source a...

Page 659: ...S NRP power sensors provide different resolutions for setting the filter length depending on the used sensor type Resolution 1 for R S NRPxx power sensors Resolution 2n for sensors of the R S NRP Zxx family with n 1 to 16 Parameters User float Range 1 to 65536 RST 1 Example SENS1 FILT TYPE USER Selects user filter mode SENS1 FILT LENG 16 Sets a filter length of 16 E g using a sensor with 20 ms tim...

Page 660: ...ch POWer FILTer SONCe Starts searching the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions You can check the result with command SENS1 POW FILT LENG USER in filter mode USER SENSe ch POWer FILTer TYPE Example SENS1 FILT TYPE USER Selects user filter mode SENS1 FILT SONC Activates the search for the optimum filter length SENS1 FILT LENG Returns the found optimum filter length Response ...

Page 661: ...h POWer FILTer NSRatio MTIMe RST AUTO Example See Example Performing a power measurement with a fixed fil ter on page 651 Manual operation See Filter on page 400 SENSe ch POWer FREQuency Frequency Sets the RF frequency of the signal if signal source USER is selected SENSe ch POWer SOURce Parameters Frequency float RST 1 GHz Example SENS1 SOUR USER Selects user defined source SENS1 FREQ 2 44GHz Set...

Page 662: ... STATe State Activates the addition of the level offset to the measured value The level offset value is set with command SENSe ch POWer OFFSet Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SENS1 POW OFFS 0 4dB Sets a level offset of 0 4 dB SENS1 POW OFFS STAT ON A level offset of 0 4 dB is added to the measured value Manual operation See Level Offset State Level Offset on page 400 SENSe ch POWer SNUMb...

Page 663: ...a sensor is connected to the instrument Return values Status 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SENS1 STAT Response 1 A sensor is connected Usage Query only Manual operation See State on page 399 SENSe ch POWer SVERsion Queries the software version of the connected R S NRP power sensor Return values SVersion string Example SENS1 POW SVER Queries the software version of the power sensor Usage Query only SENS...

Page 664: ...iguration Subsystem The SCONfiguration subsystem contains the commands for defining the system configuration setting like stream mapping and used baseband configuration Required options See Required options on page 442 Example Distributing the I Q streams to the output connectors The following example lists the commands necessary to fulfill this task Map the I Q streams to the output connectors SC...

Page 665: ...n EXTernal DIGital REMote DETect Response SMBV100A SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote ISELect Response SGT100A A SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote CONNect Manually defining the externa instrument SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote ISELect SGS_1 A SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote CONNect SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput INAMe Response SGS_1 A Use an user defined initializatio...

Page 666: ...Put1 USER5 SIGNal INSinc SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument TRIGger SYNChronization SYNC Multi Instrument Configuration 664 I Q Stream Mapping 665 External RF and I Q Instruments 665 12 15 1 Multi Instrument Configuration Commands SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument MODE 664 SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument STATe 664 SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument TRIGger SYNChronization 665 SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument MO...

Page 667: ...ration OUTPut MAPPing IQOutput STReam st STATe State Maps the I Q output streams to the output connectors Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See Example Distributing the I Q streams to the output connec tors on page 662 Manual operation See Map Stream X to Connector on page 443 12 15 3 External RF and I Q Instruments SCONfiguration EXTernal DISPlay 666 SCONfiguration EXTernal ACONnect 666 S...

Page 668: ...nal DIGital REMote DETect 673 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote ISELect 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote ISELect 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote CONNect 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote CONNect 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote INFO 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote INFO 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote DISConnect 675 SCONfiguratio...

Page 669: ...ect ALL Triggers the instrument to establish the connections to all configured external RF and I Q instruments or to disconnect all existing connections Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Event Manual operation See Connect Disconnect All Remote on page 446 SCONfiguration EXTernal PBEHaviour State If enabled the connection to the external instrument...

Page 670: ...ATe 0 SOURce1 IQ OUTPup ANALog TYPE SING Manual operation See Preset behavior Keep connections to external instru ments on page 446 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital DIRection SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput DIRection Queries the connector direction Return values Direction NONE IN OUT RST IN Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Query only Manual opera...

Page 671: ...InstrName string Returns the name of the connected external instrument InstrmentName SerialNumber Path the instrument name as retrieved via the DIG I Q interface InstrmentName RfPath or InstrmentName Serial Number the instrument name as defined in with the Remote Config settings or as defined by the command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote ADD Example See Example Connecting and configuring external ...

Page 672: ...age 448 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital RF FREQuency OFFSet FreqOffset SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput RF FREQuency OFFSet FreqOffset In coupled mode offsets the RF frequency of the external instrument with the selected delta value Parameters FreqOffset float Range 3E9 to 3E9 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example SOURce1 FREQuency CW 2143E6 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput RF COUPling ON SCONfiguration EX...

Page 673: ...t 0 01 RST 0 Example SOURce1 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 30 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput RF COUPling ON SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput RF POWer OFFSet 20 RF level of the external instrument is 50 dB Where both the RF level and the level offset are applied at the external instrument Manual operation See Delta RF Frequency RF Level on page 448 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital RF STATe RemCo...

Page 674: ...ng process running 0 Not scanning Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Query only Manual operation See Detect Scan on page 450 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote LIST Lists all available instruments found by the SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN command Return values InstrNames String String with symbolic names and or alias names Example See Example Co...

Page 675: ...Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Setting only Manual operation See External Instrument on page 451 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote REName Changes the symbolic name of the instrument Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Setting only SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote DETect Searches for external instruments connected...

Page 676: ...CONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote CONNect Triggers the connection establishment Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Event Manual operation See Apply and Connect on page 452 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote INFO SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput REMote INFO Queries information on the external instrument Return values Info string Returns inf...

Page 677: ...d files in the var user directory Use the command MMEM CDIRectory to change the default directory to the currently used one Only files with extension iec are listed Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instrument on page 662 Usage Query only Manual operation See Initialization Sequence on page 452 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote INITialization FILE Filename SCONfiguration...

Page 678: ...llowing common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description SOURce hw 1 SOURce 1 RF output optional keyword LF output SOURce LFOutput SOURce is optional keyword ENTity ch 1 Optional keyword provided for compatibility with R S SMW200A ENTity1 SOURce1 SOURce1 OUTPut ch 1 to 3 Available markers Connector Settings 677 SOURce BBIN Subsystem 681 Analog Modulation Subsystems 688 SO...

Page 679: ...puts for external modulation signals Required options See Chapter 10 2 Configuring the Global Connectors on page 515 Example Global connectors settings configuration SOURce1 INPut USER1 DIRection INP SOURce1 INPut USER1 SIGNal TRIG1 SOURce1 INPut USER3 DIRection INP SOURce1 INPut USER3 SIGNal NSEGM1 SOURce1 INPut USER5 DIRection INP SOURce1 INPut USER5 SIGNal TRIG2 SOURce1 INPut USER TRIGger LEVel...

Page 680: ...on on page 677 Manual operation See User x Connector Direction on page 521 SOURce INPut USER ch SIGNal Signal Determines the control signal that is input at the selected connector To define the connector direction use the command SOURce INPut USER ch DIRection Suffix USER ch 1 to 5 Parameters Signal TRIG1 CLOCK1 NSEGM1 NONE SYNCIN BERDATIN BERCLKIN BERDATENIN BERRESTIN TRIG1 Global Trigger CLOCK1 ...

Page 681: ...rt SYNCOUT Baseband Sync Out SCLock Symbol Clock LATTenuation Lev Att BGATA Burst Gate HOP HOP CWMODulation CW Mod TRIGgered Triggered MTRigger Manual Trigger available for USER5 LOW HIGH Always 0 1 NONE none RST MARKA1 Example See Example Global connectors settings configuration on page 677 Options BERRESTOUT BERDATENOUT BERCLKOUT BERDATOUT require R S SMBVB K80 Manual operation See Signal on pag...

Page 682: ...Rce INPut USER PULM LEVel Level Sets the threshold for any input signal at the User3 5 connectors Parameters Level float Range 0 1 to 2 Increment 0 1 RST 1 Default unit V Example See Example Global connectors settings configuration on page 677 Manual operation See Threshold User3 5 Input Threshold Pulse Input on page 524 SOURce INPut USER CLOCk IMPedance Impedance SOURce INPut USER TRIGger IMPedan...

Page 683: ...SOURce BBIN remote control commands will be supported in a future firmware version The baseband input cannot be activated The baseband input related commands in this section and in the SCONfiguration Sub system have no effect because the baseband input interfaces cannot be activated The SOURce BBIN subsystem contains the commands for setting the external digital baseband signal Required options Se...

Page 684: ...M 100000000 SOURce1 BBIN SRATe MAX 1250000000 to set the sample rate per channel SOURce1 BBIN SRATe SOURce USER SOURce1 BBIN CHANnel0 SRATe 500000000 SOURce1 BBIN SRATe SUM 500000000 SOURce1 BBIN MPERiod 3 SOURce1 BBIN ALEVel EXECute SOURce hw BBIN STATe 683 SOURce hw BBIN DIGital SOURce 683 SOURce hw BBIN DIGital INTerface 683 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 BB 683 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 BB STATe ...

Page 685: ...al operation See State on page 458 SOURce hw BBIN DIGital SOURce DigInpSource Defines the connector used as an external signal source Parameters DigInpSource CODER1 RST CODER1 Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 SOURce hw BBIN DIGital INTerface BBinDigInterfac Selects the input connector at that the signal is fed Parameters BBinDigInterfac HSDin ...

Page 686: ... 461 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 NAME BbinIqHsChanNam Queries the channel name Parameters BbinIqHsChanNam string Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 Manual operation See Name on page 460 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 POWer CFACtor BbinIqHsChCrFac Sets the crest factor of the individual channels Parameters BbinIqHsChCrFac float Range 0 to 30 Increment...

Page 687: ...ing an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 Manual operation See Level on page 461 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 SRATe BbinIqHsChSaRat Sets the sample rate per channel Parameters BbinIqHsChSaRat float Range 400 to 100E6 Increment 0 001 RST 100E6 Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 461 SOURc...

Page 688: ...ce DIN HSDin DIN Estimates the sample rate based on the digital input signal HSDin Enabled for SOURce hw BBIN DIGital INTerface HSDin RST HSDin Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 Manual operation See Sample Rate Source on page 458 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe ACTual Queries the sample rate of the external digital baseband signal Return values Actual flo...

Page 689: ... digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 Manual operation See Measurement Period on page 462 SOURce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute Starts measuring the input signal The measurement estimates the crest factor peak and RMS level Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 682 Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Level Set on page 462 SOURce hw BBIN POWer CFACt...

Page 690: ...el of the external digital baseband signal Return values Rms float Range 100 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example see Example Applying an external digital baseband signal Dig I Q on page 681 Usage Query only Manual operation See Level on page 464 SOURce hw BBIN CDEVice Indicates the ID of an externally connected Rohde Schwarz Instrument or Rohde Schwarz device Return values CDevice string None no de...

Page 691: ...ce MODulation Subsystem The command in this subsytem allows you to disable all active modulations at once and vice versa to restore the last active ones SOURce hw MODulation ALL STATe State Activates all modulations that were active before the last switching off Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SOURce1 AM1 DEPTh 30 SOURce1 AM1 SOURce LF1 SOURce1 AM1 STATe 1 SOURce1 FM1 DEViation 1000 SOUR...

Page 692: ...lation settings and switch AM on SOURce1 AM1 SOURce LF1 SOURce1 AM1 DEPTh 30 SOURce1 AM RATio 40 SOURce1 AM1 DEViation MODe UNC SOURce1 AM1 STATe 1 Example Using combined LF signals Using the internal LF generators of both paths the following command sequences con figure an amplitude modulated signal with determined deviations depths Configure the AM modulation settings with combined LF signal sou...

Page 693: ...nd turn on AM SOURce1 AM1 SOURce EXT1 SOURce1 AM1 DEPTh 40 Query the input sensitivity at the external modulation input SOURCe1 AM1 SENSitivity Response 40 Since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 50 V This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input Select the coupling mode AC for external amplitude modulation SOURce1 INP...

Page 694: ...M ch SOURce Source Selects the modulation source for amplitude modulation Suffix ch 1 to 2 Modulation signal channel Parameters Source EXT1 NOISe LF2 LF1 EXTernal INTernal LF1 LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal EXT1 Uses an externally supplied LF signal NOISe Uses the internally generated noise signal INTernal Uses the internally generated signal of LF1 EXTernal Uses an external LF signal ...

Page 695: ... 100 Increment 0 01 RST 30 Example See Example Using combined LF signals on page 690 Manual operation See Total Depth on page 357 SOURce hw AM DEViation MODE AmDevMode Selects the coupling mode The coupling mode parameter also determines the mode for fixing the total depth Parameters AmDevMode UNCoupled TOTal RATio UNCoupled Does not couple the LF signals The deviation depth values of both paths a...

Page 696: ...xample Using an external signal source on page 691 Manual operation See Sensitivity on page 356 12 16 3 3 SOURce FM Subsystem Option R S SMBVB K720 The FM subsystem contains the commands for setting the frequency modulation Example Creating a frequency modulated RF signal Using the internal LF generator the following command sequence configures a fre quency modulated signal Reset the instrument to...

Page 697: ...Combine the signals of both paths with fixed total deviation depth SOURce1 FM1 DEViation MODe TOT SOURce1 FM1 DEViation SUM 5000 Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the second path SOURce1 FM2 DEViation Response 4000 Combine the signals of both paths with fixed ratio SOURce1 FM1 DEViation MODe RAT SOURce1 FM1 RATio 100 SOURce1 FM2 DEVIation 10000 Query the deviation depth of modulati...

Page 698: ...commands are available SOURce hw FM ch STATe 696 SOURce hw FM ch DEViation 696 SOURce hw FM ch SOURce 697 SOURce hw FM DEViation MODE 697 SOURce hw FM DEViation SUM 698 SOURce hw FM RATio 698 SOURce hw FM MODE 698 SOURce hw FM SENSitivity 699 SOURce hw FM ch STATe State Activates frequency modulation Suffix FM ch 1 2 determines the modulation signal channel Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Exampl...

Page 699: ...1 NOISe LF2 LF1 INTernal EXTernal LF1 LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal INTernal Uses the internally generated signal of LF1 EXTernal Uses an external LF signal EXT1 NOISe Uses the internally generated noise signal RST LF1 FM1 LF2 FM2 Example See Example Creating a frequency modulated RF signal on page 694 Manual operation See Source on page 353 SOURce hw FM DEViation MODE FmDevMode Selec...

Page 700: ...e Using combined LF signals on page 695 Manual operation See Total Deviation on page 354 SOURce hw FM RATio Ratio Sets the deviation ratio path2 to path1 in percent Parameters Ratio float Range 0 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 100 Example See Example Creating a frequency modulated RF signal on page 694 Manual operation See Ratio Path2 Path1 on page 354 SOURce hw FM MODE Mode Selects the mode for the fr...

Page 701: ...tains the commands for setting the phase modulation You can configure the internal modulation source LF generator with the commands listed in Chapter 12 16 10 SOURce LFOutput Subsystem on page 837 Example Performing phase modulation The following example shows a command sequence to perform phase modulation Reset the instrument to start from an initial state RST CLS Set the RF signal frequency and ...

Page 702: ...ase modulation settings with combined LF signal sources SOURce1 PM1 SOURce LF1 SOURce1 PM1 DEViation 1 5 Select the modulation signal source for the second path SOURce1 PM2 SOURce LF2 Combine the signals of both paths with fixed total deviation depth SOURce1 PM1 DEViation MODe TOT SOURce1 PM1 DEViation SUM 2 Query the deviation depth of the modulation signal in the second path SOURce1 PM2 DEViatio...

Page 703: ...g phase modulation on page 699 Manual operation See State on page 352 SOURce hw PM ch SOURce Source Selects the modulation source for phase modulation signal Suffix PM ch 1 2 Sets the modulation signal channel Parameters Source EXT1 NOISe LF2 LF1 INTernal EXTernal LF1 LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal EXT1 Uses an externally supplied LF signal NOISe Uses the internally generated noise sig...

Page 704: ...Mode Selects the coupling mode The coupling mode parameter also determines the mode for fixing the total deviation Parameters PmDevMode UNCoupled TOTal RATio UNCoupled Does not couple the LF signals The deviation values of both paths are independent TOTal Couples the deviation of both paths RATio Couples the deviation ratio of both paths RST UNCoupled Example See Example Using combined LF signals ...

Page 705: ...e reports the sensitivity in RAD V It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input Return values Sensitivity float Example See Example Performing phase modulation on page 699 Usage Query only SOURce PM ch DEViation Deviation Sets the modulation deviation of the phase modulation in RAD Parameters Deviation float The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected...

Page 706: ...ion generator set trigger mode select pulse mode transition type and select the polarity of the internally generated pulse video output Trigger a single pulse SOURce PULM SOURce INT SOURce PULM TRIGger MODE SING SOURce PULM MODE DOUB SOURce PULM TTYPe SMO SOURce PULM OUTPut VIDeo POLarity INVerted SOURce PULM TRIG IMM Alternatively configure the pulse modulation settings for external modulation so...

Page 707: ...ULM OUTPut VIDeo POLarity 708 SOURce hw PULM POLarity 708 SOURce hw PULM IMPedance 709 SOURce hw PULM MODE Mode Selects the mode for the pulse modulation Parameters Mode SINGle DOUBle SINGle Generates a single pulse DOUBle Generates two pulses within one pulse period RST SINGle Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 704 Manual operation See Pulse Mode on page 358 SOURce hw PULM TRIGg...

Page 708: ...alled options R S SMBVB K22 or R S SMBVB K23 Range 20E 9 to 100 Increment 5E 9 RST 10E 6 Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 704 Manual operation See Pulse Period on page 361 SOURce hw PULM WIDTh Width Sets the width of the generated pulse that means the pulse length It must be at least 20ns less than the set pulse period Parameters Width float Range 20E 9 to 100 Increment 10E 9 R...

Page 709: ... 9 Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 704 Manual operation See Double Pulse Width on page 362 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle STATe State Provided for backward compatibility with former Rohde Schwarz signal generators Works like the command SOURce hw PULM MODE DOUBle Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 SOURce hw PULM STATe State Activates pulse modulation Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Ex...

Page 710: ...on page 704 Manual operation See Transition Type on page 351 SOURce hw PULM OUTPut VIDeo POLarity Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse video modulating signal related to the RF modulated signal Parameters Polarity NORMal INVerted NORMal the video signal follows the RF signal that means it is high wihen RF signal is high and vice versa INVerted the video signal follows in inverted mode RST NORMa...

Page 711: ...ystems which are described separately SOURce BB Subsystem General Commands 709 SOURce BB DM Subsystem 712 SOURce BB ARBitrary Subsystem 737 SOURce BB MCCW Subsystem 779 SOURce AWGN Subsystem 795 SOURce BB IMPairment Subsystem 802 SOURce BB GRAPhics Subsystem 807 SOURce BB PROGress Subsystem General Commands 810 12 16 4 1 SOURce BB Subsystem General Commands The following section describes the comm...

Page 712: ...e 253 SOURce hw BBIN POFFset POffset Sets the relative phase offset for the external baseband signal Parameters POffset float Range 999 99 to 999 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example SOURce1 BBIN POFFset 0 5 Manual operation See Phase Offset on page 253 SOURce hw BB POFFset POffset Sets the relative phase offset for the selected baseband signal Parameters POffset float Range 0 to 359 9...

Page 713: ...l of the baseband signal Usage Query only SOURce hw BB CFACtor Queries the crest factor of the baseband signal Return values CFactor float Range 0 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example SOURce1 BB CFACtor Queries the crest factor of the baseband signal Usage Query only SOURce hw BB POWer RMS Queries the RMS level of the baseband signal relative to full scale of 0 5V in terms of dB ful...

Page 714: ...l Commands 714 Save Recall Settings 717 Filter Settings 718 Modulation and Coding Settings 720 Power Ramping 723 Trigger Settings 725 Marker Settings 728 Clock Settings 730 Handling List Files 731 Programming Examples Example Performing general tasks This example shows how to enable custom digital modulation with predefined settings as basis for further customization e g adjusting the data source ...

Page 715: ...e content of an existing data list to the new data list SOURce BB DM DLISt COPY DList3 query the content of the new data list and modify it append data to it FORM ASCI SOURce BB DM DLISt DATA 2048 1024 1 1 0 0 0 SOURce BB DM DLISt DATA APPend 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 SOURce BB DM DLISt SELect DList3 query the free memory and nuber of bit to be utilized SOURce BB DM DLISt FREE SOURce BB DM DLISt POINts ...

Page 716: ...l SYNChronize OUTPut ON SOURce BB DM TRIGger EXTernal DELay 200 SOURce BB DM TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 100 with internal trigger source SOURce BB DM TRIGger SEQuence AAUTo SOURce BB DM TRIGger SOURce INTernal SOURce BB DM STAT ON SOURce BB DM TRIGger EXEC Example Enable power ramping The following example lists the provided commands SOURce BB DM PRAMp SOURce INTernal SOURce BB DM PRAM SHAP COS SOUR...

Page 717: ...lt unit Hz Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 712 Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 119 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard Standard Selects predefined set of settings according to the selected standard see Table 3 6 Parameters Standard USER BLUetooth DECT ETC GSM GSMEdge NADC PDC PHS TETRa W3GPp TDSCdma CFORward CREVerse WORLdspace TFTS APCOPH1C4fm APCOPH1CQpsk APCOPH2HCpm APCOPH2HD...

Page 718: ...he data pattern for the internal data source Parameters Pattern numeric RST H0 BitCount integer Range 1 to 64 RST 1 Example SOURce BB DM SOURce PATT SOURce BB DM PATTern B01110111010101010 17 Generates the user defined sequence of 0 1 data Manual operation See Data Source on page 120 SOURce hw BB DM PRBS LENGth Length Defines the length of the pseudo random sequence in accordance with the followin...

Page 719: ... STORe Filename Stores the current settings into the selected file the file extension dm respectively dm_stu is assigned automatically Refer to Chapter 12 6 2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory on page 618 for general information on file handling in the default and a specific direc tory Setting parameters Filename string Example See Example Performing general tasks on page ...

Page 720: ...mand selects the filter type When a standard is selected BB DM STAN the filter type and filter parameter are set to the default value Parameters Type RCOSine COSine GAUSs LGAuss CONE COF705 COEQualizer COFequalizer C2K3x APCO25 SPHase RECTangle USER PGAuss LPASs DIRac ENPShape EWPShape LTEFilter LPASSEVM APCO25Hcpm APCO25Lsm RST GAUSs Example See SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter SPHase on page 719...

Page 721: ...5 100000 0 01 0 3 LPASs Cut off frequency LPass 0 05 2 0 01 0 5 LPASSEVM Cut off frequency LPassEvm 0 05 2 0 01 0 5 PGAuss Roll off factor PGauss 0 15 2 5 0 01 0 3 RCOSine Roll off factor RCosine 0 05 1 0 001 0 35 SPHase B x T SPhase 0 15 2 5 0 01 2 100E6 base unit 200E6 R S SMBVB K523 300E6 R S SMBVB K524 Parameters SPhase float Range 0 15 to 2 5 Increment 0 01 RST 2 Example SOURce BB DM FILTe TY...

Page 722: ...xample See Example Performing general tasks on page 712 Manual operation See Coding on page 119 SOURce hw BB DM FORMat Format Sets the modulation type When a standard is selected SOURce hw BB DM STANdard the modulation type is set to the default value Parameters Format ASK BPSK P2DBpsk QPSK QPSK45 OQPSk P4QPsk P4DQpsk PSK8 P8D8psk P8EDge QAM16 QAM32 QAM64 QAM256 QAM1024 MSK FSK2 FSK4 USER FSKVar Q...

Page 723: ...efault unit PCT Example BB DM FORM ASK BB DM ASK DEPT 50 PCT Manual operation See ASK Depth on page 123 SOURce hw BB DM FSK DEViation Deviation Sets the frequency deviation when FSK modulation is selected Parameters Deviation float The value range depends on the symbol rate Range 1 to 40E6 Increment 0 5 RST 135416 5 Example SOURce BB DM FORMat FSK4 SOURce BB DM FSK DEViation 1MHZ Manual operation ...

Page 724: ...e for Variable FSK Parameters Type FSK4 FSK8 FSK16 RST FSK4 Example See SOURce hw BB DM FSK VARiable SYMBol ch0 DEViation on page 721 Manual operation See FSK Type on page 123 SOURce hw BB DM APSK16 GAMMa Gamma Sets the gamma function γ for the 16APSK modulation Parameters Gamma G2D3 G3D4 G4D5 G5D6 G8D9 G9D10 GxDy G Gamma function xy code rate RST G2D3 Example SOURce1 BB DM FORMat APSK16 SOURce1 B...

Page 725: ...Ramping SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp SOURce Source Sets the source for the power ramp control signals Parameters Source INTernal RST INTernal Example See Example Enable power ramping on page 714 Manual operation See Source on page 127 SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp SHAPe Shape Sets the edge shape of the ramp envelope Parameters Shape LINear COSine RST COSine Example See Example Enable power ramping on page 714 Ma...

Page 726: ...gnal ranges that are flagged with level attribute attenu ated by the control signal Parameters Attenuation float Range 0 to 50 Increment 0 1 RST 15 Default unit dB Example See Example Enable power ramping on page 714 Manual operation See Attenuation on page 128 SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp BBONly STATe State Enables power ramping in the baseband only or mixed power ramping in the baseband and the RF sect...

Page 727: ...n page 713 Manual operation See Mode on page 110 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger SOURce Source Selects the trigger signal source and determines the way the triggering is executed Provided are Internal triggering by a command INTernal External trigger signal via one of the User x connectors EGT1 External global trigger EGC1 External global clock In master slave mode the external baseband synchronization si...

Page 728: ... SOURce ELTRigger SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger SEQuence ARETrigger SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger RMODe Response RUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Running Stopped on page 111 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut Output Enables signal output synchronous to the trigger event Parameters Output 0 1 OFF ON RST 1 Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 713 Manual o...

Page 729: ... RST SAMPle Example See Example Specifying delay and inhibit values in time units on page 739 Manual operation See External Delay Unit on page 112 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal DELay Delay Specifies the trigger delay Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 2147483647 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit symbol Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 713 Manual operation S...

Page 730: ...Example See Example Specifying delay and inhibit values in time units on page 739 Usage Query only Manual operation See Actual Trigger Delay Actual External Delay on page 113 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal INHibit Inhibit Specifies the number of symbols by which a restart is inhibited Parameters Inhibit integer Range 0 to 21 47 symbRate RST 0 Default unit symbol Example See Example Adjusting clo...

Page 731: ...FF time for marker RATio Parameters OffTime integer Range 1 to 16777215 RST 1 Default unit symbol Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 713 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 114 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern Pattern BitCount Defines the bit pattern used to generate the marker signal Parameters Pattern numeric RST H2 BitCount integer 0 marker off...

Page 732: ... Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 114 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay Delay Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the signal expressed in terms of symbols Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 16777215 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 713 Manual operation See Marker x Del...

Page 733: ...s Catalog filename1 filename2 Returns a string of file names separated by commas Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 712 Usage Query only Manual operation See Data Source on page 120 SOURce hw BB DM CLISt SELect Filename SOURce hw BB DM FLISt SELect Filename SOURce hw BB DM MLISt SELect Filename SOURce hw BB DM DLISt SELect Select Selects the specified list file from the default d...

Page 734: ...ory CDIRectory or from the directory specified with the absolute file path Refer to Chapter 12 6 2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory on page 618 for general information on file handling in the default and a specific direc tory List type Command File extension Data list DLISt dm_iqd Control list CLISt dm_iqc User standard ULISt dm_stu User filter files FLISt vaf User mappin...

Page 735: ...Rce BB DM CLISt SELect c_list SOURce BB DM CLISt POINts 20 the control list consists of 20 lines Usage Query only SOURce hw BB DM DLISt POINts Points Defines the number of bits in the selected data list to be utilized When a list is being filled with block data this data is only ever sent in multiples of 8 bits However the exact number of bits to be exploited can be set to a different figure The s...

Page 736: ...lt directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Refer to Chapter 12 6 2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory on page 618 for general information on file handling in the default and a specific direc tory Setting parameters Filename string Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 712 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Select Data List on page 121 SOURce hw BB DM CLISt DATA...

Page 737: ...File Format on page 173 for description on how to create a control list file in ASCII format manually RST has no effect on data lists Setting parameters Data string Example MMEMory CDIrectory var user clists SOURce1 BB DM CLISt SELect clist_marker3 SOURce1 BB DM CLISt DATA 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 0 0 0 0 Enters the control values in the selected list In the example only ramps for Marker 3 are set Usage Sett...

Page 738: ... end of the existing data in the selected data list Existing content in the data list is not overwritten Hence you can create long data lists piece meal The command cannot be used with an empty data list like for example data lists that has just been created Use the command SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA first and enter modulation data in the list RST has no effect on data lists Setting parameters Bit...

Page 739: ...ing test signals The following example lists commands necessary to configure the different test sig nals Reset instrument first RST CLS SOURce BB ARBitrary PRESet Create test signals SOURce BB ARBitrary SIGNal TYPE CIQ SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ I 0 5 SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ Q 0 33 SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ CREate SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency 1MHz SOURce BB ARBitra...

Page 740: ...Bitrary WAVeform FREE Select a waveform and querry information SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform DELete var user ARBtestSigs test2 SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform SELect var user ARBtestSigs wvTest SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform POINts 100 SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform TAG TYPE SMU WV SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform TAG COMMENT Waveform for test purposes alternatively query the comment tag of the current wavefo...

Page 741: ...y TRIGger SEQuence ARETrigger SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce EGT1 external trigger signal must be provided at the USER connector SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut ON SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal DELay 200 SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 100 with internal trigger source SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SEQuence AAUTo SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce INTer...

Page 742: ...i_segment ms_waveform the directory contains the configuration files multi_segment inf_mswv and ms_waveform inf_mswv SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure DELete ms_waveform inf_mswv SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect var user ARB multi_segment config inf_mswv creates new empty configuration file config inf_mswv Append waveforms to the multi segment sequence SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGmen...

Page 743: ...ad var user ARB multi_segment config inf_mswv SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SEQuence AAUTo SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce INTernal SOURce BB ARBitrary STAT ON SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXEC Example Configuring the output order of the segments The following example lists the commands necessary to trigger the output of the seg ments in desired playback order The example lists only the relevant c...

Page 744: ...SEGment NEXT 0 Scrolling trough the segments i e shwitch over in incremental order SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT EXECute SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment 1 SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT EXECute SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment 2 Refer to To apply a manual segment switch to the output segments in the required order on page 216 for description of the steps necessary to achieve a similar task via man...

Page 745: ... 3 2 NEXT SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQuence APPend ON 2 1 SEG0 SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SMODe SEQuencer SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SEQuence AAUTo SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce INTernal SOURce BB ARBitrary STAT ON SOURce BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXEC Refer to To apply a manual segment switch to the output segments in the required order on page 216 for description of the steps necessary to ...

Page 746: ...ed SOURce1 BB W3GPp SETTing TMODel BSTation Test_Model_1_16channels Enable the generation of 3GPP FDD signal SOURce1 BB W3GPp STATe ON Generate a 3GPP FDD ARB waveform file with name 3gpp_arb store the waveform in the default directory var user SOURce1 BB W3GPp WAVeform CREate 3gpp_arb Configure a multi carrier scenario with 4 carriers and carrier spacing of 5 MHz Activate the carriers SOURce1 BB ...

Page 747: ...he save recall function to store the settings Query available settings files in a specified directory MMEM CDIR var user waveform SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing CATalog mcar1 mcar2 the directory contains the settings files mcar1 arb_multcarr and mcar2 arb_multcarr SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing STORe 3gpp_mc General Commands SOURce hw BB ARBitrary PRESet Sets all ARB generator parame...

Page 748: ...cy 747 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle OFFSet 747 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle SAMPles 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE PHASe 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE SAMPles 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ CREate NAMed 749 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle CREate NAMed 749 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SIN...

Page 749: ... 0 001 RST 0 800 Default unit FS Example see Example Creating test signals on page 737 Manual operation See Amplitude on page 157 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the test signal Parameters Frequency float Range 100 to depends on the installed options Increment 0 01 RST 1000 Default unit Hz Example See Example Creating test signals on page 737 Manu...

Page 750: ... the frequency of the simple sinusoidal test signal Parameters Frequency float Range 100 to depends on the installed options Increment 0 01 RST 1000 Default unit Hz Example See Example Creating test signals on page 737 Manual operation See Frequency on page 155 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE PHASe Phase Sets the phase offset of the sine wave on the Q channel relative to the sine wave on the I...

Page 751: ...t signals on page 737 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Generate Signal File on page 156 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ CREate SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle CREate SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away Example see Example Creating test signals on page 737 Usage Event Manual operation See Generate Signal RAM on page 15...

Page 752: ... Catalog string Returns a list of the file names separated by commas Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 738 Usage Query only SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CATalog LENGth Reads out the files with extension wv in the default directory and returns the number of waveform files in this directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory Return values Length integer N...

Page 753: ...orm POINts Queries the number of samples the number of I Q values pairs in the selected wave form file Return values Points waveform filename Range 0 to 1000 RST 1 Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 738 Usage Query only SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA Filename Data SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA Tag The setting command writes the binary block data data to the file ident...

Page 754: ...nary data in ASCII format Query parameters Tag comment copyright date lacpfilter marker name poweroffset Example Query See Example Managing waveform files on page 738 Example Setting SOURce BB ARB WAVeform DATA var user test1 wv 220 binary data Writes the binary block data binary data to file test1 wv binary data contains 20 bytes binary data is a placeholder the actual ASCII values are not printa...

Page 755: ...ified waveform file The file must contain I Q and or marker data and have been created with the command MMEMory DATA UNPRotected on page 624 Parameters Filename string Complete file path and file name with file extension wv If the file is in the default directory the file path can be omitted Setting parameters Clock float Range 400 to 100E6 Increment 1E 3 RST 1E6 Example see MMEMory DATA UNPRotect...

Page 756: ...Segment integer Range 0 to 1023 RST 0 Example see Example Configuring the output order of the segments on page 741 Usage Query only Manual operation See Current Segment Current Segment Index on page 212 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NAME Queries the name of the waveform of the currently output segment of the multi seg ment waveform Return values Name string Example See Example Configuring the ou...

Page 757: ...urce INTernal NSEGM1 RST INTernal Example See Example Configuring the output order of the segments on page 741 Manual operation See Next Segment Source on page 214 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment LMODe LevelMode Sets how the segments are leveled Parameters LevelMode HIGHest UNCHanged RST HIGHest Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary WSEGment LMODe HIGHest Manual operation See Level Mode on page 214 SOURce ...

Page 758: ...rm file Range 0 to SegmentCount 1 Count integer Defines how many times this segment is repeated Range 1 to 1048575 Next NEXT BLANk ENDLess SEG0 SEG1 SEG31 0 maxSegment Determines the action after completing the current segment like for instance which segment is processed after the processing of the current one is finished Example See Example Using the ARB sequencer on page 742 Usage Setting only M...

Page 759: ...ge 201 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer MODE Mode Defines the way the marker information within the separate segments is processed Parameters Mode IGNore TAKE RST TAKE Example see Example Adding extra marker signals on page 743 Manual operation See Segment Marker on page 206 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer ESEGment Mode SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MAR...

Page 760: ...OCk 759 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk MODE 759 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure LEVel MODE 759 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure COMMent 760 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure DELete 760 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe 760 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend 760 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect 761 SOURc...

Page 761: ...lock mode is USER Parameters Clock float Increment 1E 3 RST max SampleRate Example See Example Creating a multi segment waveform on page 740 Manual operation See User Clock Rate on page 206 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk MODE Mode Selects the clock rate mode for the multi segment waveform Use the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk to define the clock in clock ...

Page 762: ...me string Example See Example Creating a multi segment waveform on page 740 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Append Delete Shift Seg Up Down on page 204 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe OFile Defines the file name of the output multi segment waveform Parameters OFile string Example See Example Creating a multi segment waveform on page 740 Manual operation See Save List Save L...

Page 763: ...RBitrary MCARrier CARRier MODE 763 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier SPACing 763 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SAMPles 764 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME 764 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CFACtor MODE 764 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping CFACtor 765 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping CUToff 765 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping STATe 765 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary ...

Page 764: ...ier PRESet Sets all the multi carrier parameters to their default values Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier PRESet Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 227 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing CATalog Queries the available settings files in the specified default directory Only files with the file extension arb_multcarr are listed Return values Catalog string Example See Ex...

Page 765: ...ers in the ARB multi carrier waveform Parameters Count integer Range 1 to 512 RST 1 Example See Example Generating a multi carrier signal on page 744 Manual operation See Number of Carriers on page 228 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier MODE Mode The command sets the carrier frequency mode Parameters Mode EQUidistant ARBitrary RST EQUidistant Example BB ARB MCAR CARR MODE EQU Sets an equidist...

Page 766: ...ce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier SAMPles Queries the file size of the currently calculated multi carrier waveform Usage Query only Manual operation See File Size on page 232 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME Time Sets the user defined signal period Parameters Time float Range 0 to 1E9 Increment 1E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier MODE USER Selects signal period mode user SO...

Page 767: ...ffect Parameters CFactor float Range 50 to 50 Increment 0 01 RST 50 Default unit dB Example See SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping STATe on page 765 Manual operation See Target Crest Factor on page 229 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping CUToff Cutoff Sets the cutoff frequency of the final low pass filter if baseband clipping is enabled Parameters Cutoff float Range 0 to 250E6 Increment...

Page 768: ...I Q files are periodically repeated Manual operation See Signal Period Mode on page 229 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier POWer REFerence Reference Defines the way the individual carriers in a composed multi carrier signal are leveled Parameters Reference RMS PEAK RST RMS Manual operation See Power Reference on page 230 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe OFile Defines the output file name for the...

Page 769: ...turn values Clock float Range 400 to Max Increment 1E 3 Example BB ARB MCAR CLOC Queries the ARB multi carrier output clock rate Usage Query only Manual operation See Clock Rate on page 232 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CREate Creates a multi carrier waveform using the current settings of the carrier table Use the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe to define the multi carrier waveform...

Page 770: ...cy Manual operation See Carrier Freq MHz on page 234 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch PHASe Phase Sets the start phase of the selected carrier Parameters Phase float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier19 PHASe 90 Sets a start phase Manual operation See Phase on page 234 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch POWer Powe...

Page 771: ...he selected carrier Parameters File file name Example See Example Generating a multi carrier signal on page 744 Manual operation See File on page 234 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch CONFlict Queries carrier conflicts A conflict arises when the carriers overlap Return values Conflict 0 1 OFF ON 0 No conflict RST 0 Example BB ARB MCAR CARR CONF Usage Query only Manual operation See on pag...

Page 772: ... the starting power of the carriers in the defined carrier range is incremented Parameters Step float Range 80 to 80 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR POW 80dB Sets a power of 80 dB for the carriers in the carrier range BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR POW STEP 1 dB The power is incremented by 1dB for each carrier That is the first carrier has 80 dB the second 79 dB and so on...

Page 773: ... by 1 for each carrier That is the first carrier has a start phase of 90 the second a start phase of 91 and so on SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt Start Sets the start phase for the individual carriers in the defined carrier range Parameters Start float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR PHAS 90 DEG sets a start phase of 90...

Page 774: ...0 Default unit s Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR DEL 5us Sets a start delay of 5 us for the carriers in the carrier range Manual operation See Delay Start on page 237 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier FILE File Selects the input file The data of the file are modulated onto the carriers in the defined carrier range Parameters File string Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR FILE var user temp IQ_...

Page 775: ...quence The command selects the trigger mode Parameters Sequence AUTO RETRigger AAUTo ARETrigger SINGle RST AUTO Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 738 Manual operation See Mode on page 110 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce Source Selects the trigger signal source and determines the way the triggering is executed Provided are Internal triggering by a command INTernal External t...

Page 776: ... the selected units SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SLUNit as follows SAMPle Max 232 1 SEQuence Max 1000 Range 1 to dynamic RST 1 Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 738 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SLUNit SLUnit Defines the unit for the entry of the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trigger mode Parameters SLUnit SEQuence SAMPle RST SEQuence Example See Exa...

Page 777: ... Manual operation See Sync Output to External Trigger Sync Output to Trigger on page 112 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger DELay UNIT TrigDelUnit Sets the units the trigger delay is expressed in Parameters TrigDelUnit SAMPle TIME RST SAMPle Example See Example Specifying delay and inhibit values in time units on page 739 Manual operation See External Delay Unit on page 112 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIG...

Page 778: ... external trigger event is delayed for Return values ResTimeDelaySec float Range 0 to 688 Increment 0 25E 9 RST 0 Example See Example Specifying delay and inhibit values in time units on page 739 Usage Query only Manual operation See Actual Trigger Delay Actual External Delay on page 113 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal INHibit Inhibit Specifies the number of symbols by which a restart is i...

Page 779: ...the waveform file tag marker mode x is generated RST UNCHanged Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 738 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 159 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime OnTime SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime OffTime Sets the number of samples in the ON and OFF periods Parameters OffTime integer Range 1 to 14913079 RST 1 Example see Exampl...

Page 780: ...ency is derived by dividing the symbol rate by the divider Return values Frequency float Increment 0 001 Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 738 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 159 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay Delay Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the sig nals Parameters Delay float Range 0 to d...

Page 781: ...mmon suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description SOURce ch 1 Available baseband signals OUTPut ch 1 to 3 Available markers Required options See Chapter 3 9 1 Required Options on page 241 Programming Examples Generating a multi carrier signal to test the frequency response of a DUT Reset the instrument first RST CLS Configuring and enabling the multi carrier signal SOURce BB...

Page 782: ...l Switch to local mode with the command NREN Open the Multi carrier Continuous Wave Carrier Graph Generating a multi carrier signal to test the image rejection of an SSB filter This example generates a multi carrier single sideband signal as shown in Figure 12 1 Figure 12 1 Multi carrier signal to test the image rejection of an SSB filter Reset the instrument first RST CLS Configuring and enabling...

Page 783: ...0 to 80 to OFF SOURce BB MCCW STATe ON Enable signal generation OUTPut ON Enable signal output Generating a composed multi carrier signal This example generates a multi carrier signal as shown in Figure 12 2 Figure 12 2 Composed multi carrier signal Reset the instrument first RST CLS Configuring the multi carrier signal SOURce BB MCCW CARRier COUNt 100 SOURce BB MCCW CARRier SPACing 500000 Setup 1...

Page 784: ...to 35 Increase the power in 0 5dB steps starting with a power level of 10dB Apply the settings SOURce BB MCCW CARRier POWer 38 0 SOURce BB MCCW CARRier STATe 38 1 Set a power level of 0dB for carrier no 38 and activates it SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt 41 SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STOP 61 SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STATe ON SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STARt 0 SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRi...

Page 785: ... BB MCCW TRIGger SOURce INTernal SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger SOURce EGT1 An external global trigger signal must be provided at the connector configured for the External Global Trigger 1 signal SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut ON SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal DELay 200 SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 100 Applying the settings and enabling signal generation TRG SOURce BB MCCW ...

Page 786: ...ATe 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier EXECute 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW PRESet Sets all multi carrier signal parameters to their default values Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 243 SOURce hw BB MCCW STATe State Enables disables the multi carrier CW signal Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See Programming Examples on page 779 ...

Page 787: ...te depends on the number of carriers and on the selected carrier spacing Return values Clock float Range 0 to Max Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Usage Query only Manual operation See Clock Frequency on page 243 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor MODE Mode Sets the mode by which automatic settings minimize the crest factor or hold it at a chosen value Parameters Mode OFF C...

Page 788: ... to lastCarrier State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 246 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST STATe Stat0 Stat1 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST STATe Start Count Switches the carrier on or off with the aid of a value list The first value in the list is assigned to the carrier with index 0 the second value to the carrier with index ...

Page 789: ...ed optimization of the crest factor sets the start phase of the selected carrier Parameters CarrierIndex integer Range 0 to lastCarrier Phase float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example see Programming Examples on page 779 Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 246 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST PHASe Phas0 Phas1 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST PHASe Start Count Sets t...

Page 790: ...arrier Power float Range 80 to 0 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example see Programming Examples on page 779 Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 246 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer Pow0 Pow1 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer Start Count Sets the power of the carrier with the aid of a value list Setting parameters Pow0 Pow1 float Increment 0 01 RST 0 dB Query parameters Start integer start car...

Page 791: ... operation See Power Start on page 245 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STEP Step For disabled optimization of the crest factor sets the step width by which the start phase of the carriers in the defined carrier range is incremented Parameters Step float Range 359 99 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Manual operation See Phase Step on page 246 SOURce h...

Page 792: ...es on page 779 Manual operation See Carrier State on page 245 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier EXECute Adopts the settings for the carrier range Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Usage Event Manual operation See Accept on page 246 Trigger Settings SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger ARM EXECute 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXECute 791 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut 791 SOURc...

Page 793: ...e 779 Manual operation See Sync Output to External Trigger Sync Output to Trigger on page 112 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger RMODe Queries the status of signal generation for all trigger mode if multi carrier CW genera tion is on Return values RMode STOP RUN Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Usage Query only Manual operation See Running Stopped on page 111 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SLENgth S...

Page 794: ...s value and maps it automatically as follows EXTernal EGT1 Parameters Source INTernal EGT1 EGC1 EXTernal BBSY RST INTernal Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Manual operation See Source on page 111 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal DELay Delay Specifies the trigger delay Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 2147483647 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit samples Example See Programming Exampl...

Page 795: ... OUTPut ch PATTern 794 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider 794 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency 794 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay 794 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch MODE Mode Defines the signal for the selected marker output For detailed description of the regu lar marker modes refer to Marker Modes on page 94 Parameters Mode RESTart PULSe PATTern ...

Page 796: ...vider Sets the divider for pulse marker mode Parameters Divider integer Range 2 to 1024 RST 2 Example See Programming Examples on page 779 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 114 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency Queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal Return values Frequency float Increment 1E 3 Example see Programming Examples on page 779 Usage Query only M...

Page 797: ...es on page 779 Manual operation See Clock Source on page 115 12 16 4 5 SOURce AWGN Subsystem The SOURce AWGN subsystem contains the commands for setting the noise generator Required options See Chapter 4 1 1 Required Options on page 255 Programming Examples Example Generating a pure noise signal The following example generates a pure noise signal with specified bandwidth and noise level SOURce1 AW...

Page 798: ...he interfering signal SOURce1 AWGN POWer NOISe Response 90 SOURce1 AWGN POWer SUM Response 79 5860731484178 SOURce1 AWGN POWer SUM PEP Response 80 Example Generating an additive noise signal The following example shows how to adjust the AWGN settings to generate a signal with the following characteristics The carrier signal is an uplink EUTRA LTE signal with Channel Bandwidth 1 4 GHz i e Occupied ...

Page 799: ...7728170942726 SOURce1 AWGN POWer SUM PEP Response 76 SOURce hw AWGN STATe 797 SOURce hw AWGN MODE 798 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth 798 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth RATio 798 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth NOISe 799 SOURce hw AWGN DISP MODE 799 SOURce hw AWGN POWer MODE 799 SOURce hw AWGN POWer RMODe 799 SOURce hw AWGN BRATe 800 SOURce hw AWGN CNRatio 800 SOURce hw AWGN ENRatio 800 SOURce hw AWGN POWer CARRier 800 SOURce...

Page 800: ... an additive noise signal on page 796 Manual operation See Mode on page 260 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth BWidth Sets the system bandwidth Parameters BWidth float Range 1000 to 80E6 Increment 100 RST 3 84E6 Example See Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 796 Manual operation See System Bandwidth on page 261 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth RATio Ratio Sets the ratio of minimum real noise bandwidth to...

Page 801: ...xample Generating an additive noise signal on page 796 Manual operation See Show Powers for Output on page 262 SOURce hw AWGN POWer MODE Mode Selects the mode for setting the noise level Parameters Mode CN SN EN RST SN Example see Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 796 Manual operation See Set Noise Power Via on page 263 SOURce hw AWGN POWer RMODe RMode Determines whether the carr...

Page 802: ...CnRatio Sets the carrier interferer ratio Parameters CnRatio float Range 50 to 45 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 796 Manual operation See Carrier Noise Ratio Signal Noise Ratio on page 263 SOURce hw AWGN ENRatio EnRatio Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density Parameters EnRatio float Range 50 to depends on the installed options Incr...

Page 803: ...5 SOURce hw AWGN POWer NOISe TOTal Queries the noise level in the total bandwidth Return values Total float Range 145 to 20 Increment 0 01 RST 30 Example see Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 796 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Power Total Bandwidth on page 266 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM Queries the overall power of the noise interferer signal plus useful signal Return ...

Page 804: ...N FREQuency TARGet Target Sets the desired frequency of the sine wave Parameters Target float Range 40E6 to 40E6 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example see Example Generating a CW interferer signal on page 796 Manual operation See Target CW Frequency Offset on page 261 SOURce hw AWGN FREQuency RESult Queries the actual frequency of the sine wave Return values Result float Range 40E6 to 40E6 Increment 0 01 R...

Page 805: ... hw IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe 805 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch QUADrature ANGLe 805 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch QUADrature ANGLe 805 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch SKEW 805 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch SKEW 805 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment STATe 806 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch STATe 806 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch STATe 806 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch POFFset 806 SOURce BB IMPairment R...

Page 806: ...001 Analog 1 1 0 0001 Parameters IqRatio float The setting value can be either in dB or An input in percent is rounded to the closest valid value in dB Range 4 to 4 Increment 1E 4 RST 0 Default unit dB PCT setting command dB result value Example SOURce BB IMPairment RF1 IQRatio MAGNitude 10 PCT SOURce BB IMPairment RF1 IQRatio MAGNitude 0 848 the value is returned in dB Manual operation See Gain I...

Page 807: ...om the ideal 90 degrees A positive quadrature offset results in a phase angle greater than 90 degrees Table 12 4 Value range Impairments Min dB Max dB Resolution Digital 30 30 0 01 Analog 10 10 0 01 Parameters Angle float Range 30 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example SOURce BB IMPairment RF1 QUADrature ANGLe 5 Sets the quadrature offset to 5 degrees Manual operation See Quadrature O...

Page 808: ...l phase offset after the stream mapper You can shift the phase at the different stages in the signal generation flow see SOURce hw BB POFFset on page 710 Parameters PhaseOffset float Range 999 99 to 999 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example SOURce BB IMPairment RF1 POFFset 0 Manual operation See Phase Offset on page 274 SOURce hw BB IMPairment OPTimization MODE Mode Sets the optimization mode Parameters...

Page 809: ...e BB GRAPhics FFTFscale 809 SOURce hw BB GRAPhics TRIGger SOURce 809 SOURce hw BB GRAPhics MODE Mode Selects the graphics mode of the graphical signal display Parameters Mode IQ VECTor CCDF PSPectrum CONStellation EYEI EYEQ RST IQ Example BB GRAP MODE VECT Selects the vector diagram graphics mode Manual operation See Mode on page 416 SOURce hw BB GRAPhics SRATe MODE Mode Sets how the time resoluti...

Page 810: ...USER sets the sample rate mode Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 417 SOURce BB GRAPhics CLOSe Closes all graphical signal displays Usage Event Manual operation See Remove on page 418 SOURce BB GRAPhics ADD Size Adds a graphical signal display according to the current MODE SOURce SRATe and TRIGger settings Setting parameters Size MAXimized MINimized Usage Setting only Manual operation See Ad...

Page 811: ...n See FFT Length on page 416 SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTFscale State Defines the normalization of the power values in the power spectrum diagram Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON 1 Normalized power in dBFS 0 Shows power distribution in dB Hz RST 0 Example SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTFscale PSPectrum SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTFscale 1 the power spectrum shows the normalized power in dBFS Manual operation See Full Scale...

Page 812: ... hw BB PROGress MCODer SOURce hw BB PROGress MCODer ARBitrary MCARrier SOURce hw BB PROGress MCODer ARBitrary WSEGment Queries the status of an initiated process like for example the calculation of a signal in accordance to a digital standard or the calculation of a multi carrier or multi segment waveform file Return values WSegment integer Indicates the task progress in percent Range 0 to 100 RST...

Page 813: ...rary RF frequencies Further hardware settings are not considered Reset the instrument to start from an initial state Query the available user correction list files in the default directory Select a file or create a new one RST CLS SOURce1 CORRection CSET CATalog Response shows the name of available user correction files if applicable Select a file SOURce1 CORRection CSET SELect var user ucor1 Crea...

Page 814: ...er POINTs 6 SOURce1 CORRection STATe 1 Query the correction value at a certain frequency FREQ 120000000 SOURce1 CORRection VALue 52 13 Example User correction data exchange The following example shows a command sequence to export a user correction list here the list created with the example before into an ASCII file Further hardware set tings are not considered Select a user correction file for ex...

Page 815: ...16 5 1 Correction Settings SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency Frequency Enters the frequency value in the table selected with SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect Parameters Frequency Frequency 1 Frequency 2 String of values with default unit Hz Example See Example Create a table with user defined correction values for the RF level on page 811 Manual operation See Edit List Mode Data on page 343...

Page 816: ...o select the used power sensor set the suffix in key word SENSe Example See Example Fill user correction data with sensor on page 812 Usage Event Manual operation See Fill User Correction Data with Sensor on page 389 SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect Filename Selects or creates a file for the user correction data If the file with the selected name does not exist a new file is created Parameters Fil...

Page 817: ...th Sensor on page 389 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA SENSor ch POWer SONCe Fills the selected user correction list with the level values measured by the power sen sor for the given frequencies Suffix SENSor ch Defines the used power sensor i e the sensor whose values are used Example See Example Fill user correction data with sensor on page 812 Usage Event SOURce hw CORRection STATe State Activate...

Page 818: ...only Manual operation See UCOR Data on page 385 12 16 5 2 Correction Data Exchange With the following commands you can configure user correction lists and export or import them accordingly SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of user correction data in the cur rent or specified directory Return values Catalog string List of ASCII files...

Page 819: ...etween the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Parameters Column TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe RST COMMa Example See Example User correction data exchange on page 812 Manual operation See ASCII File Settings on page 340 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal Decimal Sets the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point num...

Page 820: ... Example User correction data exchange on page 812 Manual operation See Select Source Select ASCII Destination on page 341 12 16 5 3 Frequency Response Commands This section lists the frequency response commands related to the I Q modulator Example Enabling high quality optimization SOURce1 CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization MODE QHIG SOURce1 CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization BANDwidth MODE A...

Page 821: ...on BANDwidth MODE FreqRespOptBwMo For SOURce hw CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization MODE QHIG QHT sets how the signal bandwidth is estimated automatically or manually with the command SOURce hw CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization BANDwidth VALue Parameters FreqRespOptBwMo AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example See Example Enabling high quality optimization on page 818 Manual operation See Optimization Ban...

Page 822: ...e for current setting on page 283 12 16 6 SOURce FREQuency Subsystem The SOURce FREQuency subsystem contains the commands used to define the fre quency settings for the RF sources and sweeps Example Frequency configuration SOURce1 FREQuency MODE CW SOURce1 FREQuency CW 6000000000 SOURce1 FREQuency OFFSet 2000000000 SOURce1 FREQuency MULTiplier 1 5 SOURce1 FREQuency CW 11000000000 SOURce1 FREQuency...

Page 823: ...enerators Signal generator 1 One path instrument uses its internal oscillator signal Signal generator 1 Two paths instrument receives the LO signal from the first instrument and assigns it to both paths Signal generator 3 One path instrument receives the LO signal from the second instrument Address and reset the first instrument RST CLS Configure the oscillator signal of the first instrument SOURc...

Page 824: ... 822 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator MODE 823 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator OUTPut FREQuency 823 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator OUTPut STATe 823 SOURce hw FREQuency MODE 824 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed 824 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL 825 SOURce hw FREQuency MANual 825 SOURce hw FREQuency MULTiplier 826 SOURce hw FREQuency OFFSet 826 SOURce hw FREQuency CENTer 827 SOURce hw FREQuency SPAN ...

Page 825: ...ency LOSCillator OUTPut FREQuency Queries the current frequency of the local oscillator at the LO Out connector Return values Frequency float Range 100E3 to 20E9 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Example Set up of LO coupling and LO level adjustment with three Rohde Schwarz signal generators on page 821 Usage Query only Manual operation See LO OUT Frequency on page 308 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillat...

Page 826: ... on page 827 SOURce hw FREQuency MANual on page 825 LIST Sets list mode The instrument processes frequency and level settings by means of values loaded from a list To configure list mode settings use the commands of the Chap ter 12 16 11 SOURce LIST Subsystem on page 850 RST CW Example See Example Frequency configuration on page 820 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page ...

Page 827: ...B B103 Manual operation See Frequency on page 290 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL Rcl Set whether the RF frequency value is retained or taken from a loaded instrument con figuration when you recall instrument settings with command RCL Parameters Rcl INCLude EXCLude INCLude Takes the frequency value of the loaded settings EXCLude Retains the current frequency when an instrument configuration is lo...

Page 828: ...and level display with a downstream instrument on page 288 Parameters Multiplier float Range 1 to dynamic Increment 0 001 RST 1 Example See Example Frequency configuration on page 820 Manual operation See Multiplier on page 291 SOURce hw FREQuency OFFSet Offset Sets the frequency offset fFREQ OFFSet of a downstream instrument The parameters offset fFREQ OFFSer and multiplier NFREQ MULT affect the ...

Page 829: ...ets the sapn of the frequency sweep range See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Parameters Span float Full freqeuncy range Increment 0 01 RST 400E6 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Manual operation See Span on page 332 SOURce hw FREQuency STARt Start Sets the start frequency for the RF sweep See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parame...

Page 830: ...ds FREQ UP or FREQ DOWN Parameters Mode DECimal USER DECimal Increases or decreases the level in steps of ten USER Increases or decreases the level in increments set with the command FREQ STEP INCR RST DECimal Example increasing the RF frequency with a step size of 50 KHz SOURce1 FREQuency STEP 50E3 SOURce1 FREQuency STEP MODE USER SOURce1 FREQuency CW UP Manual operation See Variation Active on p...

Page 831: ...INPut MODext IMPedance ch 829 SOURce INPut TRIGger SLOPe 830 SOURce hw INPut MODext COUPling Coupling Selects the coupling mode for an externally applied modulation signal Parameters Coupling AC DC AC Passes the AC signal component of the modulation signal DC Passes the modulation signal with both components AC and DC RST AC Example SOURce1 INPut MODext COUPling AC SOURce1 INPut MODext IMPedance G...

Page 832: ...odula tion Required options See Chapter 5 1 Required Options on page 277 SOURce hw IQ SOURce 830 SOURce hw IQ STATe 831 SOURce hw IQ GAIN 831 SOURce hw BB IQGain 831 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor 831 SOURce hw IQ SWAP STATe 831 SOURce hw IQ WBSTate 832 SOURce hw IQ SOURce Source Selects the input signal source for the I Q modulator Parameters Source BASeband ANALog External signals disable the amplitud...

Page 833: ...ange of 16 dB divided into 2 dB steps DB0 DB2 DB4 DB6 DB8 Activates the specified gain of 0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB DBM2 DBM4 Activates the specified gain of 2 dB 4 dB RST DB4 Example SOURce1 BB IQGain DB2 SOURce1 IQGain DB2 Manual operation See Baseband Gain on page 281 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor CrestFactor Specifies the crest factor for the external analog signal Parameters CrestFactor float Range...

Page 834: ...d mode Manual operation See I Q Wideband on page 280 12 16 9 SOURce IQ OUTPut Subsystem The SOURce IQ OUTPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the ana log and digital I Q output signals For information about the required options see Chapter 8 7 I Q Analog Output Settings on page 464 For information on the connector and interfaces the analog and digital I Q signals are output at see C...

Page 835: ...IQ OUTPut ANALog SETTing LOAD 834 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog SETTing DELete 834 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog TYPE 835 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog MODE 835 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut LEVel 835 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS COUPling STATe 836 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS I 836 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS Q 836 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet I 836 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet Q 836 SOURce hw I...

Page 836: ...age 467 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog SETTing STORe Filename Stores the current settings into the selected file the file extension iqout is assigned automatically Setting parameters Filename filename Filename or complete file path Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 467 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog SETTing LOAD Filename Loads the selected file from the default or the specified d...

Page 837: ...e I Q Connection on page 447 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog MODE Mode Determines the mode for setting the output parameters Parameters Mode FIXed VARiable VATTenuated FIXed Locks the I Q output settings VARiable Unlocks the settings VATTenuated Attenuates the signal with the value set with the command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog POWer DATTenuation RST FIXed Example See Example Enabling and configuring ...

Page 838: ...SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS Q Q Specifies the amplifier bias Vbias of the respective I or Q component The value range is adjusted so that the maximum overall output voltage does not exceed 4V see Maximum overall output voltage on page 466 Parameters Q float Range 3 6V to 3 6V Increment 1E 4 RST 0 Default unit V Example See Example Enabling and configuring the analog output on page 833 Manual o...

Page 839: ...ion See Digital Attenuation on page 469 12 16 10 SOURce LFOutput Subsystem The SOURce LFOutput subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal source in CW and Sweep mode and for analog modulation Example Setup an LF sweep The following example shows a command sequence to set up an LF sweep Reset the instrument to start from an initial state RST CLS Set the trigger mode the sweep mode an...

Page 840: ...LS SOURce1 LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE MANual Activate the LF frequency sweep SOURce1 LFOutput FREQuency MODE SWEep Activate LF Output1 SOURce1 LFOutput1 STATe 1 Input the frequency manually for each step SOURce1 LFOutput1 FREQuency MANual 2 kHz SOURce1 LFOutput1 FREQuency MANual 2 1 kHz Alternatively use UP or DOWN parameter with set step width SOURce1 LFOutput1 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 500 ...

Page 841: ...in this section you can configure the LF signal source SOURce LFOutput ch BANDwidth 840 SOURce LFOutput ch FREQuency 840 SOURce hw LFOutput ch PERiod 840 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MANual 841 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE 841 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STOP 841 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STARt 841 SOURce LFOutput ch STATe 842 SOURce LFOutput ch INTernal VOLTage 842 SOURce LFOutput OFFSet...

Page 842: ...al source Internal is set the instrument performs the analog modulations AM FM PhiM PM with this frequency In sweep mode SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE SWE the fre quency is coupled with the sweep frequency Parameters Frequency float Range depends on the installed options RST 1000 Default unit Hz Example SOURce1 LFOutput1 FREQuency 5 kHz sets the LF frequency Manual operation See Frequency on p...

Page 843: ...put FREQuency MODE Mode Sets the mode for the output of the LF generator frequency and determines the com mands to be used for frequency settings Parameters Mode CW FIXed SWEep CW FIXed Sets the fixed frequency mode CW and FIXed are synonyms To set the output frequency use command SOURce LFOutput ch FREQuency SWEep Sets sweep mode To set the frequency use the commands SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency ...

Page 844: ... 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 838 Manual operation See State on page 371 SOURce LFOutput ch INTernal VOLTage Voltage Sets the output voltage for the LF generators The sum of both values must not exceed the overall output voltage set with command SOURce LFOutput VOLTage Suffix ch 1 2 LF1 and LF2 Parameters Voltage float Range 0 to 4 Increment 0 001 RST 1...

Page 845: ...ects an internally generated noise signal EXT1 Selects an externally supplied LF signal AM Selects the AM signal FMPM Selects the signal also used by the frequency or phase modula tions RST LF1 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 838 Manual operation See Source on page 371 SOURce LFOutput SIMPedance SImpedance Selects the impedance of the LF output Parameters SImpedance G600 G...

Page 846: ...ers Shape SINE SQUare TRIangle TRAPeze RST SINE Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 838 Options TRIangle TRAPeze require R S SMBVB K24 Manual operation See Shape on page 366 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe DCYCle DCycle Sets the duty cycle for the shape pulse Parameters DCycle float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 1E 6 RST 50 Default unit PCT Example See Example Configuring the ...

Page 847: ...ge 838 Manual operation See Pulse Width on page 367 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze FALL Fall Selects the fall time for the trapezoid shape of the LF generator Parameters Fall float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 10E 9 RST 250E 6 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 838 Manual operation See Trapezoid Rise Fall on page 368 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze HIGH High Sets the ...

Page 848: ...rator Parameters Rise float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 10E 9 RST 250E 6 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 838 Manual operation See Trapezoid Rise Fall on page 368 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRIangle PERiod Period Sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Parameters Period float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 1...

Page 849: ...t SWEep FREQuency SHAPe 849 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing 849 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 849 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 850 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl Dwell Sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep Parameters Dwell float Range 0 001 to 100 Increment 100E 6 RST 0 01 Default unit s Example See Example Setup an LF...

Page 850: ...eep step only The frequency increases by the value set with the coammnds SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear linear spacing SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic logarithmic spacing RST AUTO Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 837 Manual operation See Mode on page 328 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts Points Sets the number of steps in an LF sweep For inf...

Page 851: ...sweep sequence shape Parameters Shape SAWTooth TRIangle RST SAWTooth Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 837 Manual operation See Shape on page 329 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing Spacing Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Parameters Spacing LINear LOGarithmic RST LINear Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 837 Manual operation See Spacing on page 330 SOURce ...

Page 852: ...etup an LF sweep on page 837 Manual operation See Step Linear Step Logarithmic on page 333 12 16 11 SOURce LIST Subsystem The SOURce LIST subsystem contains all commands for defining lists and for han dling of list files List files have the predefined file extension lsw Refer to Chapter 12 6 2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory on page 618 for general information on file ha...

Page 853: ...000 19000 10000 150000 220000 SOUR1 LIST FREQ POIN 7 SOUR1 LIST POW POINT 7 SOUR1 LIST DWEL LIST POIN 7 SOUR1 LIST FREE 2147483647 bytes of free memory Use dwell times from list Configure the list mode parameters Enable RF output SOUR1 LIST MODE AUTO SOUR1 LIST TRIG SOUR AUTO SOUR1 LIST DWEL MODE LIST OUTP1 STAT ON Use global dwell time Set only a part of the list value pairs 3 to 5 to be processe...

Page 854: ... LIST IND 2 value canges when the value is queried again Deactivate the list mode SOUR1 FREQ MODE CW Example List mode data exchange The following example shows a command sequence to export a list here the RF list created with the example before into an ASCII file Further hardware settings are not considered RST CLS LIST DEXC MODE EXP Set ASCII data parameters Set the ASCII file extension the deci...

Page 855: ...e hw LIST DWELl LIST POINts 854 SOURce hw LIST FREQuency 855 SOURce hw LIST FREQuency POINts 855 SOURce hw LIST INDex 855 SOURce hw LIST INDex STARt 856 SOURce hw LIST INDex STOP 856 SOURce hw LIST MODE 856 SOURce hw LIST POWer 856 SOURce hw LIST POWer POINts 857 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger EXECute 857 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce 857 SOURce hw LIST RUNNing 858 SOURce hw LIST DWELl Dwell Sets the glob...

Page 856: ...rameters Dwell Dwell 1 Dwell 2 block data You can either enter the data as a list of numbers or as binary block data The list of numbers can be of any length with the list entries separated by commas In binary block format 8 4 bytes are always interpreted as a floating point number with double accuracy See also FORMat DATA on page 640 for more details Example See Example Create an RF list and acti...

Page 857: ...stalled options Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Manual operation See Edit List Mode Data on page 343 SOURce hw LIST FREQuency POINts Queries the number points of frequency entries in the seleced list Return values Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Usage Query only SOURce ...

Page 858: ...list according to the selected mode and trigger source see LIST TRIG SOUR AUTO SING or EXT Parameters Mode AUTO STEP AUTO Each trigger event triggers a complete list cycle STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in the list processing cycle The list is processed in ascending order In this mode you can select between LIST TRIG SOUR SING or EXT RST AUTO Example See Example Create an RF list a...

Page 859: ...ed list Return values Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Usage Query only SOURce hw LIST TRIGger EXECute Starts the processing of a list in list mode Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Usage Event Manual operation See Execute Single on page 338 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce S...

Page 860: ... is executed once EXTernal The list is triggered externally and executed once RST AUTO Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Manual operation See Mode on page 337 SOURce hw LIST RUNNing Queries the current state of the list mode Return values State 0 1 OFF ON 1 Signal generation based on the list mode is active Example See Example Create an RF list and activa...

Page 861: ...Setting parameters Filename string Filename or complete file path file extension is optional Example See SOURce hw LIST DELete ALL on page 859 Usage Setting only Manual operation See List Mode Data on page 338 SOURce hw LIST DELete ALL Deletes all lists in the set directory This command can only be executed if No list file is selected List mode is disabled Example SOUR1 LIST CAT list my_list SOUR1...

Page 862: ...eration See Reset on page 338 SOURce hw LIST SELect Filename Selects or creates a data list in list mode If the list with the selected name does not exist a new list is created Parameters Filename string Filename or complete file path file extension can be omitted Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 850 Manual operation See List Mode Data on page 338 12 16 11 3...

Page 863: ...w LIST DEXChange EXECute Executes the import or export of the selected list file according to the previously set transfer direction with command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange MODE Example See Example List mode data exchange on page 852 Usage Event Manual operation See Import Export on page 341 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension Extension Determines the extension of the ASCII file for import or ex...

Page 864: ... used in the ASCII data with floating point numerals Parameters Decimal DOT COMMa RST DOT Example See Example List mode data exchange on page 852 Manual operation See ASCII File Settings on page 340 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange MODE Mode Determines the import or export of a list Specify the source or destination file with the command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange SELect Parameters Mode IMPort EXPort RST IM...

Page 865: ...e1 NOISe LEVel ABSolute 13 86 SOURce hw NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth 863 SOURce hw NOISe BWIDth STATe 863 SOURce hw NOISe DISTribution 864 SOURce hw NOISe LEVel RELative 864 SOURce hw NOISe LEVel ABSolute 864 SOURce hw NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth BWidth Sets the noise level in the system bandwidth when bandwidth limitation is enabled Parameters BWidth float Range 100E3 to 10E6 Increment 100E3 RST 100E3 Examp...

Page 866: ...49 18 to 52 67 Increment 0 1 RST 69 84 Example See Example Configuring the noise generator on page 863 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Density on page 372 SOURce hw NOISe LEVel ABSolute Queries the level of the noise signal in the system bandwidth within the enabled band width limitation Return values Absolute float Noise level within the bandwidth limitation RST 3 84 MHz Example See E...

Page 867: ...UTPut STATe 865 SOURce hw PGENerator STATe 866 SOURce hw PGENerator OUTPut POLarity Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal Parameters Polarity NORMal INVerted NORMal Outputs the pulse signal during the pulse width that means dur ing the high state INVerted Inverts the pulse output signal polarity The pulse output signal is suppressed during the pulse width but provided during the lo...

Page 868: ... commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal relative to a reference signal of the same frequency Example Programming Example change the phase relative to the current phase SOURce1 PHASe 2 DEG adopt the setting as the current phase SOURce1 PHASe REFerence The following commands are available SOURce hw PHASe 866 SOURce hw PHASe REFerence 866 SOURce hw PHASe Phase Specifies the phase va...

Page 869: ... hw POWer LBEHaviour 870 SOURce hw POWer LIMit AMPLitude 870 SOURce hw POWer LMODe 871 SOURce hw POWer MANual 871 SOURce hw POWer MODE 872 SOURce hw POWer PEP 872 SOURce hw POWer POWer 872 SOURce hw POWer STARt 873 SOURce hw POWer STOP 873 SOURce hw POWer STEP MODE 873 SOURce hw POWer STEP INCRement 874 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 874 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL 875 SOURce hw PO...

Page 870: ...n values of the internal ALC table ON Activates internal level control permanently ONSample Starts the internal level control with the first change ONTable Starts with the attenuation setting from the table and continues with automatic level control RST AUTO Example POW ALC ON Activates internal level control Manual operation See State on page 379 SOURce hw POWer ALC DSENsitivity Sensitivity Sets ...

Page 871: ...ull RF output power To protect the DUT from damage due to high input power use the setting POW ALC SLEV ATT or POW ALC SLEV MIN Parameters SampLevel FULL MINimum ATTenuated RST FULL Example POW ALC SLEV MIN Sets the automatic level control to minimum Manual operation See Sample Level on page 381 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation DIGital AttDigital Sets a relative attenuation value for the baseband signa...

Page 872: ...evel display Manual operation See Display Level as Voltage of EMF on page 513 SOURce hw POWer LBEHaviour Behaviour Selects the level behavior at the RF output over time Parameters Behaviour AUTO UNINterrupted MONotone CVSWr USER UNINterrupted MONotone Do not use the uninterrupted level settings and strictly monotone modes in combination with the high quality optimization mode see SOURce hw BB IMPa...

Page 873: ...es a very pure sinewave signal RST NORMal Example SOURce1 POWer LMODe LOWD Sets low distortion mode The instrument reduces distortions of the RF signal to a minimum Manual operation See Mode on page 295 SOURce hw POWer MANual Manual Sets the level for the subsequent sweep step if SWE POW MODE MAN Use a separate command for each sweep step Parameters Manual float You can select any level within the...

Page 874: ...p an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Manual operation See State RF level sweep on page 327 SOURce hw POWer PEP Queries the PEP Peak Envelope Power of digital modulation or digital standards at the RF output This value corresponds to the level specification displayed in the status bar header Return values Pep float Example POW PEP Response 4 The PEP value of digital modulation is 4 dBm at t...

Page 875: ... Where the values are set with the commands SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet SOURce hw POWer STARt SOURce hw POWer STOP Range Minimum level to maximum level RST 30 Start 10 Stop Default unit dBm Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Manual operation See Start Level Stop Level on page 334 SOURce hw POWer STEP MODE Mode Defines the type of step width to vary the ...

Page 876: ...eys Parameters Increment float Range 0 to 200 Increment 0 01 RST 1 Default unit dB Example See SOURce hw POWer STEP MODE on page 873 Manual operation See Variation Step on page 291 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset Sets the level offset of a downstream instrument The level at the RF output is not changed To query the resulting level as it is at the output of the downstream instrument u...

Page 877: ...Vel IMMediate AMPLitude Amplitude Sets the RF level applied to the DUT To activate the RF output use command OUTPut hw STATe RF On RF Off The following applies POWer RF output level OFFSet where POWer is the values set with SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RF output level is set with SOURce hw POWer POWer OFFSet is set with SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Parameters Amplitude float...

Page 878: ...unit dBm Example SOURce1 POWer RANGe UPPer 15 SOURce1 POWer RANGe LOW 50 Usage Query only Manual operation See Level Range on page 295 SOURce POWer WIGNore State Ignores level range warnings Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 0 Example SOURce POWer WIGNore 1 12 16 16 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem The SOURce ROSCillator subsystem contains the commands for setting the exter nal and in...

Page 879: ... and 1 GHz output SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut FREQuency MODE DER10M SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut ALTernate FREQuency MODE DER1G Query calibration value CALibration ROSCillator 32767 Set an internal source Activate user defined adjustment value of 1000 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INT SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe 1 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 1000 to resume calibrated state SOURce ...

Page 880: ... the RF output is turned off when the external reference signal is selected but missing Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 0 Example See Example Configuring the reference oscillator on page 877 Manual operation See Deactivate RF Output if external reference is missing on page 302 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the external reference Parameters...

Page 881: ...few Hz Suitable for external reference sources with phase noise worse than the R S SMBV100B WIDE Uses the widest possible synchronization bandwidth For more information see data sheet RST n a factory preset Example See Example Configuring the reference oscillator on page 877 Manual operation See Synchronization Bandwidth on page 303 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal MLRange Queries the minimum locking r...

Page 882: ...cy 1GHZ Forwards the input reference frequency to the reference frequency output RST n a factory preset DER10M Example See Example Configuring the reference oscillator on page 877 Manual operation See Reference Output 1GHz Reference Output on page 304 SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut ALTernate FREQuency MODE OutpFreqMode Sets the output reference frequency Parameters OutpFreqMode LOOPthrough DER1G OFF OF...

Page 883: ...her the calibrated off or a user defined on adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON 0 Fine adjustment with the calibrated frequency value 1 User defined adjustment value The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state The calibration value is however not changed The instrument resumes the calibrated state if you send SOURce ROSCillator INTernal...

Page 884: ...ep width defined with LOGarithmic only Reset the instrument to start from an initial state Switch off display update to improve performance especially with short dwell times Set the sweep mode first two commands and the sweep range Select linear spacing Select the waveform shape for the frequency sweep RST CLS SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF TRIGger1 FSWeep SOURce SINGle SOURce1 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUT...

Page 885: ...ut the frequency manually for each step SOURce1 FREQuency MANual 200 MHz SOURce1 FREQuency MANual 201 MHz Alternatively use the UP or DOWN commands with the set step width SOURce1 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 1 MHz SOURce1 FREQuency MANual UP SOURce hw SWEep POWer DWELl 884 SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE 884 SOURce hw SWEep POWer POINts 884 SOURce hw SWEep POWer SPACing MODE 885 SOURce hw SWEep POWer S...

Page 886: ... MANual The level value increases at each step by the value that you define with SOURce hw POWer STEP INCRement Values directly entered with the command SOURce hw POWer MANual are not taken into account STEP Each trigger triggers one sweep step only The level increases by the value entered with SOURce hw POWer STEP INCRement RST AUTO Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page...

Page 887: ...termined step size for the RF level sweep The level is increased by a logarithmically calculated fraction of the current level See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Parameters Logarithmic float The unit dB is mandatory Range 0 01 to 139 dB Increment 0 01 RST 1 Default unit dB Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Manual operation See S...

Page 888: ...up an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Manual operation See Mode on page 328 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency POINts Points Sets the number of steps within the RF frequency sweep range See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN LOG The command always affects ...

Page 889: ...APe Shape SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SHAPe Shape Determines the waveform shape for a frequency sweep sequence Parameters Shape SAWTooth TRIangle RST SAWTooth Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 882 Manual operation See Shape on page 329 SOURce hw SWEep POWer EXECute SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency EXECute Executes an RF frequency sweep The command performs a single sweep and ...

Page 890: ...ly SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic Logarithmic Sets a logarithmically determined step width for the RF frequency sweep The value is added at each sweep step to the current frequency See Chapter 6 10 2 1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode on page 320 Parameters Logarithmic float The unit is mandatory Range 0 01 to 100 Increment 1E 3 RST 1 Default unit PCT Example See Example Setup an R...

Page 891: ...do not directly affect signal generation Example Retrieving information on network related settings SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus 1 SYSTem PROTection1 STATe 0 123456 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE STAT SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 10 113 0 104 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress DNS 10 0 2 166 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname SMBV100B 102030 SYSTem COMMunicate NET...

Page 892: ...D 115200 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource TCPIP 10 113 0 104 5025 SOCKET SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource USB 0x0AAD 0x01df 100001 INSTR Example Querying the error queue SYSTem ERRor STATic 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range returns all static errors that are collected in the error queue SYSTem ERRor HISTory ClEar deletes the history entries...

Page 893: ...COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 901 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 902 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity 902 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource 902 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 902 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource 903 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource 903 SYSTem HELP EXPort 903 SYSTem IDENtification 903 SYSTem IDENtification PRESet 904 SYSTem IRESponse 904 SYSTem ORESponse 904 SYSTem L...

Page 894: ...the SCPI standard Volatile errors are reported once at the time they appear Identi cal errors are reported repeatedly only if the original error has already been retrieved from and hence not any more present in the error queue Example SYST ERR ALL Queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only Manual opera...

Page 895: ... ALL 0 No error i e the error queue is empty Positive value Positive error numbers denote device specific errors Negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI Example SYST ERR CODE Queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor COUNt Queries the number of entries in t...

Page 896: ... SYST ERR Queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only Manual operation See Static Errors Error History on page 950 SYSTem ERRor GNEXt Similar to SYSTem ERRor NEXT but queries the next entry from the global per sistant error event queue Return values NextGlobalError string Error event number Error e...

Page 897: ...e touchscreen and controls for the manual operation of the instrument The display shows the current settings VNConly Locks the touchscreen and controls for the manual operation and enables remote operation over VNC The display shows the current settings TOFF Locks the touchscreen for the manual operation of the instru ment The display shows the current settings DISabled Locks the display the touch...

Page 898: ...controls To enable the controls send SYST KLOC OFF Manual operation See User Interface on page 541 SYSTem SAV Pathname Saves the current instrument settings to a file with defined filename Setting parameters Pathname string Example SYSTem SAV var user Instrument_settings svrcltxt Usage Setting only SYSTem RCL Pathname Loads a file with previously saved instrument settings Setting parameters Pathna...

Page 899: ...protection level 1 SYSTem PROTect1 STATe 0 123456 Internal adjustments are accessible Manual operation See Protection Level Password on page 537 SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe SecPassWord MmemProtState Activates volatile mode so that no user data can be written to the internal memory per manently To enable volatile mode reboot the instrument Otherwise the change has no effect Parameters MmemProtSta...

Page 900: ...90 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the GPIB interface To change the GPIB address use the command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Return values Resource string Example See Example Finding out the used VISA ressource strings on page 890 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Address Sets the GPIB address Parameters Address ...

Page 901: ... information on network related set tings on page 889 Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE STATic SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 10 113 0 105 Manual operation See Address Mode on page 563 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress MacAddress Queries the MAC address of the network adapter This is a password protected function Unlock the protection level 1 to access it see SYSTem PROTe...

Page 902: ...gs on page 889 Usage Query only Manual operation See Network Status on page 562 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon DOMain Domain Determines the primary suffix of the network domain Parameters Domain string Example See Example Retrieving information on network related set tings on page 889 Manual operation See DNS Suffix on page 564 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname Hostname Sets an individ...

Page 903: ...es the network DNS server to resolve the name Parameters DNS string Example See Example Retrieving information on network related set tings on page 889 Manual operation See DNS Server on page 564 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway Gateway Sets the IP address of the default gateway Parameters Gateway string Range 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example See Example Retrieving information on network...

Page 904: ...ctory preset NONE Example See Example Finding out the used VISA ressource strings on page 890 Manual operation See Parity on page 566 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource Queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface This string is used for remote control of the instrument Return values Resource string Example See Example Finding out the used VISA ressource strings on page...

Page 905: ...essource strings on page 890 Usage Query only SYSTem HELP EXPort Saves the online help as zip archive in the user directory Example SYSTem HELP EXPort MMEM CDIR var user MMEM CAT Log DIR 4096 help tgz BIN 69836600 confirms that help zip archive is saved Usage Event Manual operation Setup Help Export Help to User Path SYSTem IDENtification Identification Selects the mode to determine the IDN String...

Page 906: ...em IRESponse IdnResponse Defines the user defined identification string for IDN Note While working in an emulation mode the instrument s specific command set is disabled i e the SCPI command SYST IRES is discarded Parameters IdnResponse string Example SYST IDEN USER Selects a user defined identification SYST IRES Test Device Defines identification string test device IDN Response test device Manual...

Page 907: ... INFormation SCPI InfoString Inserts system information in recorded SCPI command lists for example information on a missing command Parameters InfoString string Example SYST INF SCPI missing command enters the information into a recorded SCPI command list SYSTem SECurity SANitize STATe SecPassWord MmemProtState Sanitizes the internal memory Parameters MmemProtState 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Setting paramet...

Page 908: ...Tem SPECification Id Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter Setting parameters Id string Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet as quieried with the command SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog on page 907 Return values ValList float Comma separated list with the specified and if available the typical value of the parameter as specified in the data sheet See a...

Page 909: ...ery the IDs of all parameters listed in the selected data sheet version SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS Query the data sheet information on a specific parameter defined by its ID SYSTem SPECification ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS Rreturned is the specified and if available the typical value of the parameter Usage Query on...

Page 910: ...pends on Return values ValList float Comma separated list with the specified and if available the typical value of the parameter as specified in the data sheet Example Note The following values are merely an example Your instru ment may not support the same parameters SYST SPEC PAR ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS 0 1 SYST SPEC PAR ID_RF_LEVEL_MAX_GENERAL_DBM 0 1 Usage Query only SYSTem SPECification VE...

Page 911: ...OURce1 FREQuency CW 4000000000 SOURce1 FREQuency OFFSet 1000000 SOURce1 AM1 STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 Usage Query only SYSTem STARtup COMPlete Queries if the startup of the instrument is completed Return values Complete 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SYST STAR COMP Response 1 the startup of the instrument is completed Usage Query only SYSTem DATE Year Month Day Queries or sets the date for the instrument ...

Page 912: ... on page 930 SYSTem NTP STATe UseNtpState Activates clock synchronization via NTP Parameters UseNtpState 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 0 Example SYSTem NTP STATe 1 Manual operation See Use Time from NTP Server on page 931 SYSTem TIME Hour Minute Second Queries or sets the time for the instrument internal clock This is a password protected function Unlock the protection level 1 to access it see...

Page 913: ...urn values Catalog Usage Query only Manual operation See Timezone on page 930 SYSTem UPTime Queries the up time of the operating system Return values UpTime ddd hh mm ss Example SYSTem UPTime Response 0 08 11 00 Usage Query only SYSTem BIOS VERSion Queries the BIOS version of the instrument Return values Version string Example SYST BIOS VERS queries the BIOS version Response 123456 Usage Query onl...

Page 914: ...eans the directory the R S SMBV100B stores user files on Return values PathUser string Example SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Response var user Usage Query only SYSTem DFPR Queries the device footprint of the instrument The retrieved information is in machine readable form suitable for automatic further processing Return values DeviceFootprint string Information on the instrument type device identificat...

Page 915: ...s See Chapter 10 3 3 Assigning Actions to the User Key on page 529 Setting parameters TimeMs integer Wait time in ms Range 0 to 10000 RST 0 Example SYSTem WAIT 10000 waits 10s before resetting the instrument RST Usage Setting only SYSTem FILes TEMPorary DELete Deletes the temporary files from the internal memory or if installed from the Non Vola tile Memory Example SYSTem FILes TEMPorary DELete te...

Page 916: ...Ble 916 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 916 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 916 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 917 STATus QUEue NEXT 917 STATus OPERation CONDition Quieries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instru ment The content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the cu...

Page 917: ... 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Opera tion register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATus OPERation PTRansition Ptransition Sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered ...

Page 918: ...ed for a service request If a bit in the ENABle part is 1 and the correesponding EVENt bit is true a positive transition occurs in the summary bit This transition is reportet to the next higher level Parameters Enable string Example STAT QUES ENAB 1 Problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit STATus QUEStionable EVENt Event Queries the content of the EVENt part ...

Page 919: ... in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to SYSTem ERRor NEXT on page 894 Return values Next string Example STATus QUEue queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurre...

Page 920: ...Baseband Selftest on page 937 TEST BB BNC CONNection Queries the BNC connection test result This is a password protected function Unlock the protection level 1 to access it see SYSTem PROTect ch STATe Return values TestStatus 0 1 RUNning STOPped Example SYSTem PROTect1 0 123456 TEST BB BNC CONNection RUN test is running Usage Query only Manual operation See Execute BNC Connection Test on page 936 ...

Page 921: ...2 USER3 USER4 USER5 RST USER2 Example SYSTem PROTect1 0 123456 TEST BB BNC DESTination USER1 Manual operation See Destination on page 936 TEST BB BNC LOG Queries the log message reported during the BNC connector test This is a password protected function Unlock the protection level 1 to access it see SYSTem PROTect ch STATe Return values Log string Example SYSTem PROTect1 0 123456 TEST BB BNC LOG ...

Page 922: ...s Filename string Example TEST BB GENerator ARBitrary 3gpp wv Tests the loaded waveform generating a 3GPP signal Manual operation See Select ARB File on page 939 TEST BB GENerator FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the test sine or constant I Q test signal Parameters Frequency float Range 250E6 to 250E6 Increment 1E 3 RST 1E6 Example TEST BB GENerator FREQuency 50 MHz Manual operation See F...

Page 923: ...ST SINE Example TEST BB GENerator SOURce SINE Manual operation See IQ Source on page 938 TEST BB GENerator STATe State Starts the test generator Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example TEST BB GENerator STATe ON activates the test generator Manual operation See State on page 938 TEST hw ALL STARt Usage Event Starts the selftest Use the command TEST hw ALL RESult to query the result TEST hw ALL R...

Page 924: ...d be used if compatibility is an important consideration In addition to these commands see more trigger related commands in the modulation and RF signal subsystems Table 12 5 Cross reference between the manual and remote control R S proprietary value name SCPI conform value name Parameter in manual control AUTO IMMediate Auto mode SINGle BUS Single mode EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mo...

Page 925: ...ly SINGle BUS Executes one complete sweep cycle The following commands initiate a trigger event TRG on page 614 SOURce hw SWEep POWer EXECute SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency EXECute TRIGger hw SWEep IMMediate TRIGger hw PSWeep IMMediate and TRIGger hw FSWeep IMMediate Set the sweep mode with the commands SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE AUTO STEP SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO STEP SOURce hw LFOutput SWE...

Page 926: ...stead of the respective SWEep FREQ POW EXECute command Example TRIG Starts all active sweeps Usage Event Manual operation See Execute Single Sweep on page 331 TRIGger hw LFFSweep Executes an LF frequency sweep in the following configuration TRIG LFFS SOUR SING LFO SWE MODE AUTO Example LFO SWE MODE AUTO TRIG LFFS SOUR SING TRIG LFFSweep Usage Event 12 21 UNIT Subsystem The UNIT subsystem is used t...

Page 927: ...ch as RF phase or the manual control or display Parameters Angle DEGree DEGRee RADian RST RADian UNIT POWer Power Sets the default unit for all power parameters This setting affects the GUI as well as all remote control commands that determine power values Parameters Power V DBUV DBM RST DBM UNIT VELocity Velocity Sets the default unit for the velocity of the wave Parameters Velocity MPS KMH MPH N...

Page 928: ...ng shipment Insufficient protection against mechanical and electrostatic effects during shipment can damage the instrument When shipping an instrument use the original packaging If you do not have the original packaging use sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from moving around inside the box Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging Secure the instr...

Page 929: ... 2 Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always operate properly 3 Clean the touchscreen as follows a Apply a small amount of standard screen cleaner to a soft cloth b Wipe the screen gently with the moist but not wet cloth c If necessary remove any excess moisture with a dry soft cloth 13 2 Storing and Packing The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data s...

Page 930: ...When a long period of time has passed since the last adjustments If the ambient temperature of the instrument significantly differs from the one of the last adjustments Additional Information to the Adjustments During adjustments a progress indicator shows the status of the process If any error occurs the process aborts and an error message appears in the info line The extent of the adjustments de...

Page 931: ...ocol for synchronizing all connected instru ments and computer systems to minimize time delays in the network Access Select System Config Setup Maintenance Date Time The Date Time dialog contains the time and data settings of the operating sys tem This function is password protected Unlock the protection level 1 to access it The required remote commands are described in Chapter 12 17 SYSTem Subsys...

Page 932: ...et in the operating system in the format hh mm ss The time setting corresponds to the selected Use Time from NTP Server Remote command SYSTem TIME on page 910 Timezone Selects the timezone You can select the timezone according to the major cities on the respective continents Note By typing the first letter you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the desired destination Remote command SY...

Page 933: ...13 3 2 2 How to Test the Front Panel on page 932 In case of malfunctions Contact the Rohde Schwarz customer support see Chapter 14 6 Collecting Infor mation for Technical Support on page 951 Accessing the online help in the check front panel dialog or exiting via Esc During the test the actual functions of all keys are disabled including the Help and the Esc keys 13 3 2 1 Check Front Panel Setting...

Page 934: ... Front Panel dialog opens 3 Press a key on the front panel Check if the corresponding key in the Check Front Panel dialog turns green 4 Press the same key a second time Check that the key in the dialog turns red Note Pressing the same key again has no further effect except for the Esc key see Press the ESC key a third time 5 Continue with the next key on the front panel and repeat step 3 to step 5...

Page 935: ... your finger one or more lines for example diagonally across the screen The test traces the movements of your finger on the screen The following results are expected If the lines are uninterrupted the touchscreen works properly If there are any gaps the touch sensitive functionality is damaged To return to the Check Front Panel dialog press Esc If there are malfunctions Performing Maintenance Task...

Page 936: ...on of the temper ature at the beginning of the adjustment compared to the last adjustment We recom mend that you perform internal adjustments if the instrument is warmed up but depending on instrument usage less than 30 minutes are sufficient Further functions and individually targeted calibration routines are also available but password protected Calibration routines Self calibration routines tha...

Page 937: ...Offset Since Last Full Adjustment Displays the temperature difference comparing the temperature at the beginning of the last adjustment to the temperature at the beginning of the present adjustment If the temperature deviates more than 5 K the background of the parameter turns yellow Remote command CALibration hw ALL TEMP on page 630 Information Displays information to the current adjustment state...

Page 938: ...e instrument 6 Select Execute BNC Connections Test Execute Baseband Connections Test Performs a connection test on each of the internal digital baseband links The test implies to all installed options as baseband inputs motherboard universal coding generators and baseband outputs The result succeeded or failed is displayed in the status field on the right Remote command n a BNC Connections Test Th...

Page 939: ...he baseband selftest The remote command required to start the test is described in Chapter 12 19 TEST Subsystem on page 917 Execute Baseband Selftest Performs a baseband selftest The result succeeded or failed is displayed in the status field on the right Remote command TEST BASeband on page 918 Log Message Displays the log message reported during the baseband test Remote command n a 13 3 6 Selfte...

Page 940: ...source Sine Generates a sine waveform with frequency as set with the parameter Frequency Constant I Q Uses a constant I Q test signal For more details see Chapter 3 6 3 4 Constant IQ Test Signal on page 158 ARB Selects a signal generated by the ARB Select the waveform file with the parameter Select ARB File Remote command TEST BB GENerator SOURce on page 921 Gain Sets the gain for a sine or a cons...

Page 941: ...erator ARBitrary on page 920 13 3 7 FPGA uC Update Settings Access Select System Config Setup Maintenance FPGA µC Update This dialog enables you to check for and install internal assembly updates Settings Check For Updates 939 Assembly 939 Install 940 Shut down 940 Check For Updates Check for updates of the FPGA µC Remote command n a Assembly The table shows the installed assemblies and their stat...

Page 942: ...rectory on its internal memory and if available on the Non Volatile Memory This predefined directory is a protected system directory that is not accessible via the File Manager but you can delete all temporary files stored there To achieve more free disc space on the internal memory 1 Select System Config Setup Maintenance Delete Temporary Files 2 Select Delete Temporary Files The content of the p...

Page 943: ...ervice manual The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in chapter 4 of the service manual Most of the hardware options have to be installed at an authorized Rohde Schwarz service center 13 3 9 1 Hardware Configuration Settings Access Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Hardware Config The Hardware Config dialog lists all installed assemblies and ...

Page 944: ...or PCI bus Remote command DIAGnostic hw BGINfo on page 633 Counter Displays information on the operation times of the R S SMBV100B Operation Time h Counter Displays the operation time in hours Remote command n a Power On Count Counter Displays the number of power on Remote command n a Last Factory Calibration Counter Displays the date of the last factory calibration Remote command CALibration DATA...

Page 945: ...ivered with the latest firmware version available You can download firmware updates and the Release Notes that describe the modifi cations and the firmware update procedure See www rohde schwarz com firmware smbv100b Remote command n a Downgrade Info Shows downgrade information like factory firmware version and minimum firmware version to that the instrument can be downgraded Remote command n a Sh...

Page 946: ... tab shows the versions of the technical specification of the R S SMBV100B and of the software components that comprise the firmware Package Name of the component Version Current issue of the component E g the data sheet covers the technical data of the hardware compo nents of the factory settings See also Data Sheet on page 576 Remote command SYSTem SPECification VERSion FACTory on page 908 13 3 ...

Page 947: ...or messages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instru ment operation can be ensured To access the Info dialog with a list of current mes sages and a detailed description of each message select Info In the remote control mode error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor If the error queue is...

Page 948: ...e instrument in alphabeti cal order as well as an explanation of the error situation The positive error codes mark the errors specific to the instrument The device specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Error Code Error Description Remedy 50 Extern reference out of range or disconnected External re...

Page 949: ...ooting the instrument firmware The driver is not compatible with the hardware or software configuration of the instrument 241 No current list There is no list selected To execute the required operation a list has to be selected in the related dialog If no list is available a new list must be cre ated 242 Unknown list type speci fied The list type selected is not valid for the required operation Fo...

Page 950: ... the file extension is changed the lists are no longer recognized and the data is therefore invalid Example the extension of a waveform file wv was changed to txt Check the file extension 14 4 Querying Error Messages The R S SMBV100B monitors the functions performed and automatically detects errors and irregularities The instrument displays the messages in the Info line and records them in the bac...

Page 951: ...not reported repeatedly In the Info line identical errors are displayed repeatedly only if the original error has already disappeared from the display If queried by SCPI command identical errors are only reported if the original error has already been retrieved from and hence not any more present in the error queue Indication and handling of permanent messages If any critical error occurs the R S ...

Page 952: ...n the History view 14 5 Resolving Network Connection Failures Several issues may cause failures in the network connection to the instrument This section lists the most likely reasons and the recommended solutions Common reasons for network connection failures Network connecting cables and cable connectors of poor quality Incompatibility between the network interface of the R S SMBV100B and certain...

Page 953: ...uickly and efficiently if you provide them with information on the instrument and an error description The following dialog boxes in the Setup Instrument Assembly menu provide useful information Hardware Configuration hardware assemblies Software and Options the status of all software and hardware options instal led on your instrument System Messages displayed in the Info line and provide informat...

Page 954: ...tar gz is created and stored in the usb directory Collect the error information and attach it to an email in which you describe the problem Send the email to the customer support address for your region as listed on the Internet http www customersupport rohde schwarz com To remove sensitive data For information on how to handle or remove the sensitive data from your instru ment refer to the descri...

Page 955: ... A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter Remote Control Commands There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent Commands Instrument responses Commands Commands program messages are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The command...

Page 956: ...d and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control The instrument automatically returns to remote state when a remote command is sent UNLESS NREN was sent before GTR Go to Remote Enables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command after NRE...

Page 957: ...ument identification string A 1 3 2 Syntax for Device Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section DISPlay WINDow 1 4 MAXimize Boolean FORMat READings DATA type length HCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB red green blue...

Page 958: ...tries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Example Definition HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant N Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 Different numbering in remote control For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec tion used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the d...

Page 959: ... e g blank The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description Allowed parameters are Numeric Values 957 Special Numeric Values 958 Boolean Parameters 958 Text Parameters 959 Character Strings 959 Block Data 959 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolut...

Page 960: ...d negative INFinity NINF represent the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as instrument respon ses NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a instrument response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of miss ing values Example Setti...

Page 961: ...a For example a command using a block data parameter has the following structure FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data byte...

Page 962: ...ple Definition HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in...

Page 963: ...breviated When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semi colon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path A 1 3 6 Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specifi...

Page 964: ...commands if they are sent in separate command lines An overlapping command is still running when the next command starts Usually an overlapping command takes a certain time to process its task and thus allows the program to execute other tasks while it is still running If overlapping com mands have to follow a specific order for example to avoid incorrect measurement readings they must be executed...

Page 965: ...takes only little time to process The two synchronization commands simply block overlapped execution of the command Append the synchronization command to the overlapping command for example SINGle OPC For time consuming overlapped commands you can allow the controller or the instru ment to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the fol lowing methods OPC with a service...

Page 966: ...also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received Example Overlapping command with OPC The instrument implements RST as an overlapped command Assuming that RST takes longer to execute than OPC sending the following command sequence results in initiating a reset and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR RST OPC Sending the following commands still initiates a reset RST...

Page 967: ...s process blocks the processing of further tasks during execution The query for completeness is performed with the OPC command It returns a 1 in the output buffer when the process is completed SENS ZERO OPC Instead of waiting via OPC you can perform alternative tasks while the zeroing is running as for example updating the GUI or adjusting other instruments Synchronize the commands by querying the...

Page 968: ... ascending from left to right Figure A 1 Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy OPER Operation Status Summary Bit RQS MSS Service Request Generation ESB Standard Event Status Summary Bit MAV Message Available in Output Queue QUES Questionable Status Summary Bit 2 Error Event Queue 1 0 not used Note This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register Additional Basics o...

Page 969: ... is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview Error Event Queue The error event queue contains all errors and events that have occurred in the past When reading the queue the instrument starts with the first occurred error event All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request ...

Page 970: ...ransition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is change...

Page 971: ...rument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the S...

Page 972: ... The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ES...

Page 973: ...OND or STAT QUEST EVEN Table A 7 Meaning of the bits used in the questionable status register Bit No Meaning 0 15 Not used A 1 5 6 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation This condition part contains information on the actions currently being performed by the instrument while the event part contains information on the actions performed by the instrument since the last readout of the register To...

Page 974: ...bit 0 of ESE Operation Complete SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Pol...

Page 975: ...or more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well A 1 5 8 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of...

Page 976: ...ent to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis ters Especial...

Page 977: ...lientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize TcpClient cpp include string defines structs for socket handling include netinet in h using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient public TcpClient TcpClient void connectToServer string hostname int port void disconnect void transmit string txString void receive string rxString string getC...

Page 978: ...stInfo NULL currentHostName currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf error connecting host n currentHostName hostname currentPort port currentSocketDescr socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 if currentSocketDescr 0 currentHostName currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf can t create socket n serverAddress sin_family currentHostInfo h_addrtype serverAddres...

Page 979: ... length transmitBuffer txString length n newline is needed if send currentSocketDescr transmitBuffer txString length 1 0 0 throw string can t transmit data n delete transmitBuffer void TcpClient receive string rxString if clientIsConnected throw string connection must be established before any data can be received n char receiveBuffer new char receiveBufferSize memset receiveBuffer 0 receiveBuffer...

Page 980: ...netRawCommand server ip scpi command endl int main int argc char argv int errorCode 0 no error bool useSingleCommand false string singleCommand string hostname int port 5025 string input TcpClient client switch argc case 3 useSingleCommand true singleCommand argv 2 case 2 hostname argv 1 break default printUsage return 1 try client connectToServer hostname port bool terminate false while terminate...

Page 981: ...ing endl client disconnect return errorCode A 3 Extensions for User Files The Table A 10 lists all available file extensions for user files The currently available files on the instrument depend on the installed options Table A 10 List of the automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument Function List type Contents File suffix Instrument State Settings Instrument settings savrcltxt Lice...

Page 982: ...n dm_iqc Settings Digital modulation settings dm User Standard Digital modulation user standard dm_stu User Mapping Digital modulation user mapping vam User Filter Digital modulation user filter vaf Setting Envelope shaping function shaping table iq_lut iq_lutpv Settings Envelope shaping function polynomial coeffi cients iq_poly Settings DPD Settings dpd Setting Predistortion function AM AM and AM...

Page 983: ...g of the CDMA2000 dialog cdma2k Settings Complete setting of the TD SCDMA2000 dialog tdscdma Settings Test Model for TD SCDMA2000 tdtmd Settings Complete setting of the 1xEV DO dialog 1xevdo Settings Complete setting of the IEEE 802 11 WLAN dia log wlann Settings Beamforming data bmf Settings Complete setting of the IEEE 802 16 WiMAX dialog wimax Settings Complete setting of the EUTRA LTE dialog e...

Page 984: ...pecifications refer to the data sheet B 1 GPIB Bus Interface Pin assignment Figure B 1 Pin assignment of GPIB bus IEEE 488 interface Bus lines Data bus with 8 lines D0 to D7 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code D0 is the least significant bit D7 the most significant bit Control bus with five lines IFC Interface Clear active LOW resets the interfaces of the instrum...

Page 985: ...t connected is accepting the data on the data bus Interface functions Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus interface can be equipped with dif ferent interface functions Table B 1 lists the interface functions for the R S SMBV100B Table B 1 GPIB bus interface functions Control character Interface function SH1 Handshake source function source handshake full capability AH1 Handshake sink ...

Page 986: ...tation C CFast card CFast card is a type of removable memory storage that can hold files with user data Support of this memory type is optional and requires option R S SMBVB B80 Throughout this description the CFast card is referred as a removable memory This memory cannot be installed if the mSata card is installed See also System drive Channel Digital Input Digital Output The signal provided at ...

Page 987: ...form D daisy chain A connection scheme in which instruments are connected together in sequence i e an output of the first one is the connected to an input of the second one etc DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNS Domain Name System server E e g For example F File transfer The transmission of files from or to the instrument by a remote client The instrument supports the standard methods Fi...

Page 988: ...r R S SMBV that generates syn chronous and time aligned signals The master instrument generates and outputs a dedicated synchronization signal Sync Out that has to be fed into the slave instruments See Chapter 8 3 1 Connecting Multiple Instruments in Master Slave Mode on page 428 MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Outputs mSata Memory that holds the operating system the firmware and used data Throughout...

Page 989: ... USB using Virtual Instrument Software Architecture VISA The instrument is controlled either directly or supported by instrument drivers Remote device External device controls the R S SMBV100B in remote operation mode see Remote operation Synonyms External controller Client device Remote operation Allows you to operate the R S SMBV100B from a remote device via VNC Both the R S SMBV100B and the rem...

Page 990: ... the instruments and acts as trigger signal System drive The system drive is a μSD card that holds the operating system the firmware and the user data Throughout this description the system drive is referred as an internal memory T Trigger Internally generated or externally supplied signal which starts signal genera tion at a particular point in time Trigger event A trigger event is caused by the ...

Page 991: ...Ghtness 636 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe 639 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe ALL 639 DISPlay DIALog ID 638 DISPlay DIALog OPEN 638 DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff 636 DISPlay PSAVe STATe 636 DISPlay UPDate 637 FORMat BORDer 640 FORMat SREGister 640 FORMat DATA 640 HCOPy DATA 642 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 642 HCOPy FILE NAME 643 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory 644 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory CLEar 644 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE 6...

Page 992: ...66 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital DIRection 668 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital INAMe 669 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital IQConnection STATe 668 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital RCONnection STATe 669 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote CONNect 674 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote DETect 673 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote DISConnect 675 SCONfiguration EXTernal DIGital REMote INFO 6...

Page 993: ...URGe 675 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote REName 673 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN 672 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN STATe 672 SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument MODE 664 SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument STATe 664 SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument TRIGger SYNChronization 665 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing IQOutput STReam st STATe 665 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing RF STReam st STATe 665 SENSe ch UN...

Page 994: ...Municate NETWork IPADdress 899 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE 899 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress 899 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource 899 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart 900 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus 900 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon DOMain 900 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname 900 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon WORKgroup 901 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWo...

Page 995: ...96 SYSTem SECurity SANitize STATe 905 SYSTem SECurity SUPolicy 905 SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe 897 SYSTem SHUTdown 913 SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog 907 SYSTem SPECification PARameter 908 SYSTem SPECification VERSion 907 SYSTem SPECification VERSion CATalog 908 SYSTem SPECification VERSion FACTory 908 SYSTem SPECification 906 SYSTem SRData 909 SYSTem STARtup COMPlete 909 SYSTem TIM...

Page 996: ...airment IQOutput ch LEAKage Q 804 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch POFFset 806 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch QUADrature ANGLe 805 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch SKEW 805 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch STATe 806 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch DELay 803 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch IQRatio MAGNitude 804 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch LEAKage I 804 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch LEAKage Q 804 SOURce BB IMPa...

Page 997: ...uency MODE 880 SOURce ROSCillator PRESet 878 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce 878 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 881 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe 881 SOURce hw AM DEPTh SUM 693 SOURce hw AM DEViation MODE 693 SOURce hw AM RATio 694 SOURce hw AM ch SENSitivity 694 SOURce hw AM ch SOURce 692 SOURce hw AM ch STATe 692 SOURce hw AM ch DEPTh 692 SOURce hw AWGN BRATe 800 SOURce hw AWGN BW...

Page 998: ...IT CARRier PHASe STEP 771 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt 771 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STEP 770 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STARt 770 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STARt 770 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STATe 769 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STOP 770 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARr...

Page 999: ... CREate NAMed 749 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE PHASe 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE SAMPles 748 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CATalog LENGth 750 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CATalog 750 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CLOCk 753 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA 751 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DELete 751 SOURce hw BB ARBi...

Page 1000: ...SELect 731 SOURce hw BB DM CLISt TAG 736 SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk SOURce 730 SOURce hw BB DM CODing 720 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt CATalog 731 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt COPY 734 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA 735 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA APPend 736 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DELete 732 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt FREE 732 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt POINts 733 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt SELect 731 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt TAG 736 SOURc...

Page 1001: ...M SETTing LOAD 717 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing STORe 717 SOURce hw BB DM SOURce 716 SOURce hw BB DM SRATe 715 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard 715 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt CATalog 717 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt DELete 718 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt LOAD 717 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt STORe 717 SOURce hw BB DM STATe 714 SOURce hw BB DM SWITching STATe 723 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger ARM EXECute 7...

Page 1002: ...er EXECute 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STEP 789 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt 789 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STEP 789 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STARt 789 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STATe 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STOP 790 SOURce hw BB MCCW PRESet 784 SOURce hw BB MCCW STATe 784 SOURce hw BB MCCW TR...

Page 1003: ... BBIN ROUTe 710 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe MAX 685 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SOURce 686 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SUM 685 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe ACTual 686 SOURce hw BBIN STATe 683 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 813 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts 814 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA POWer 813 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts 814 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA SENSor ch POWer SONC...

Page 1004: ...URce hw FREQuency STEP MODE 828 SOURce hw FREQuency STEP INCRement 828 SOURce hw FREQuency STOP 828 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed 824 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL 825 SOURce hw INPut MODext COUPling 829 SOURce hw INPut MODext IMPedance ch 829 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor 831 SOURce hw IQ GAIN 831 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude 804 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage I 804 SOURce hw IQ IMPair...

Page 1005: ...40 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe 844 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe DCYCle 844 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe PERiod 844 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe WIDTh 845 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze FALL 845 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze HIGH 845 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze PERiod 846 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze RISE 846 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRIangle PERiod 846 S...

Page 1006: ...Se REFerence 866 SOURce hw PM DEViation MODE 702 SOURce hw PM DEViation SUM 702 SOURce hw PM MODE 702 SOURce hw PM RATio 703 SOURce hw PM SENSitivity 703 SOURce hw PM ch SOURce 701 SOURce hw PM ch STATe 701 SOURce hw POWer ALC DSENsitivity 868 SOURce hw POWer ALC SLEVel 869 SOURce hw POWer ALC SONCe 868 SOURce hw POWer ALC STATe 867 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation DIGital 869 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuati...

Page 1007: ...ic 885 SOURce hw SWEep RESet ALL 889 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency DWELl 885 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency EXECute 887 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE 886 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency POINts 886 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RETRace 887 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RUNNing 888 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SHAPe 887 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SPACing 886 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 888 SOURce hw SWEep FREQ...

Page 1008: ...e0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 192 MARKER MODE GENERATOR 183 MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE Mode 187 MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK ClockSeg0 ClockSeg1 ClockSegN 1 188 MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT NumOfSeg 186 MWV_SEGMENT_FILES FileNameSeg0 wv FileNameSeg1 wv FileNameSegN 1 wv 188 MWV_SEGMENT_LENGTH SamplesSeg0 SamplesSeg1 SamplesSegN 1 187 MWV_SEGMENT_LEVEL_OFFS RMSOffs_dBSg0 PeakOffs_dBSg0 RMSOffs_dBSgN 1 PeakOffs_dBSgN 1 188 ...

Page 1009: ...le 246 Access configuration menu Graphics 418 Accidental trigger Avoiding 101 Accurate level measurement Measurement period 439 Active connections Remote access 568 Active elements 78 Add change delete User key action 529 Additive noise 260 Adjust BB input signal 461 463 Display and keyboard 510 Display settings 509 I Q modulator 279 Keyboard settings 509 Adjustment frequency Reference oscillator ...

Page 1010: ...tate 379 Automation 550 Autonegotiation Failed 950 Failure 38 Avahi LAN services 544 Average level Power viewer 399 Avoiding signal gaps 198 Avoiding wrap around 198 AWGN Additive white gaussian noise 255 Subsystem 795 AWGN mode 260 B B x T DM 125 Bandwidth Cosine filter 126 Modulation input 369 Noise generator 370 Baseband Channel 461 Input 72 Selftest 937 Baseband connection selftest 936 Baseban...

Page 1011: ...ulti segment waveform 206 Clock signal Internal 91 Clock source 115 Internal 91 Close Show SCPI command 591 Coding DM 119 Colon 959 Comma 959 Command sequence recommendation 974 Remote 615 Commands 953 Brackets 959 Colon 959 Comma 959 Command line structure 961 Common 953 Double dagger 959 Instrument control 953 Overlapping 962 Question mark 959 Quotation mark 959 SCPI confirmed 953 Sequential 962...

Page 1012: ...le I Q bias 469 Coupling mode AM FM PhiM 368 External modulation input 368 Create 202 232 Multi carrier waveforms 223 New directory 493 Create and load 202 232 Crest factor BB Input 464 Channel 461 Desired value 244 External analog signal 281 Match 438 Optimize MCCW 243 Where to find the value 439 Crest factor mode 229 Current frequency Adjust 279 Sweep 328 Current index List mode 336 Current leve...

Page 1013: ...55 PhiM 355 Device ID 532 912 Device reset 616 Device specific commands 953 Device specific error messages 946 DHCP 39 Dialog Snapshots 512 Dialog boxes 79 DIFF I Q see I Q BAR 438 Differential coding DM 119 DIG IQ auto setting 461 463 Digital attenuation 469 RF level 294 Digital Attenuation RF level sweep 334 Digital I Q Input 455 Digital inputs Connector type 458 Digital modulation See DM 116 Di...

Page 1014: ...of range or disconnected 50 946 File contains invalid data 465 948 Filename missing 463 947 Hardware revision out of date 201 947 Invalid EEPROM data 203 947 Invalid filename extension 464 948 No current list 241 947 This modulation forces other modulations off 140 946 Unknown list type specified 242 947 Waveform Protected 261 947 Error Messages 945 device specific 946 SCPI 946 Error queue 969 Err...

Page 1015: ...1 Filter parameter B x T 125 Cut off frequency factor 125 Impact 106 Roll off factor 125 Finding out the default directory 473 617 Firmware Factory version 943 Min version 943 Version 943 Firmware options see Software options 71 Fixed Frequency 290 Fixed mode I Q Out 468 Flexible dynamic switch over 216 217 Without signal interruptions 217 Floating licenses 944 FM 346 Deviation 353 Deviation mode ...

Page 1016: ... RF and I Q 451 Head panel see Status bar 42 Header see Status bar 42 Help 25 82 High speed switch over How to 218 HiSLIP Protocol 555 Resource string 553 History Undo Redo 548 Host name see computer name 38 40 Hostname 563 External RF and I Q 452 LXI 571 see computer name 38 40 Hotspot 76 How to Change the default directory 618 Use an absolute file path 618 HSPA 88 HSPA 88 HTTP LAN services 544 I...

Page 1017: ...27 Save 614 628 Interface functions GPIB bus 983 Interface clear 982 Interface messages 953 954 Interfaces GPIB 557 USB 556 Interferer CW generation 255 Interfering signal Use an external digital signal 437 Internal Clock reference 91 Internal adjustments About 928 internal memory Deleting temp files 940 Interrupt 972 Invalid results Remote control 962 IoT eMTC 88 NB IoT 88 IP address 553 Changing...

Page 1018: ...0 Offset 371 Period 367 Pulse duty cycle 367 Pulse width 367 Shape 366 Source 371 373 Source impedance 371 Sweep reset 331 Trapezoid high 368 Trapezoid rise fall 368 Triangle rise 367 Voltage 371 LF sweep Frequency 367 License for software option 944 Infos 943 Limit RF level 293 Linux 35 List Define 339 Range 339 State 336 Values defining 343 387 List file Catalog 338 List mode Create list automat...

Page 1019: ... 953 Instrument 953 Instrument responses 954 Interface 953 MIN 958 Min version Firmware 943 Minimum locking range 303 Mnemonics 954 Optional 956 Mode Attenuator settings 376 Emulation 567 Frequency modulation 354 Graphics 416 I Q Out 468 IP address 563 List 337 Local oscillator 307 PhiM 355 PULM 358 Pulse modulation 358 RF level 295 Sweep 328 User variation 291 296 Modulation AM 349 Analog 346 Ban...

Page 1020: ...8 Number of carriers 228 243 Number of licenses 944 Numeric data entry 80 Numeric parameters 81 957 Numeric values Special 958 O OFDM 89 Offset Envelope E 470 Frequency 291 I Q OUT 470 Inverted envelope E BAR 470 Offset I Q Impairments 273 Old password Setup security 547 Old user password Setup 546 On screen keyboard 81 On screen keypad 78 ON OFF ratio marker 96 Open source acknowledgment OSA 26 O...

Page 1021: ...ker trace 181 191 Periodical markers 172 Phase First carrier 246 Subsystem 866 Phase fluctuations between RF signals How to minimize 427 Phase modulation 354 Deviation 354 Deviation mode 355 Mode 355 Ratio 355 State 352 Subsystem 699 Phase offset 253 Between the I Q streams 443 Phase reference 297 Phase start 236 Phase step 236 246 Phase aligned RF signals How to 427 Phase coherent RF signals How ...

Page 1022: ...rity input 364 Source 350 State 350 Subsystem 703 Threshold pulse input 524 Transition type 351 Width 361 Pulse Duty cycle 367 Length PULM 361 Period 367 Width 367 Width PULM 361 Pulse divider marker 95 Pulse frequency marker 95 Pulse generator Delay 362 Output polarity 362 Output state 362 Single Trigger 362 Subsystem 864 Width 361 Pulse graph Zoom In Out 363 Zoom position 363 Zooming 363 Pulse m...

Page 1023: ... Visa resource string 565 Identification 567 IDN string 568 Instrument emulations 567 IP address mode 563 Language 567 Network gateway 564 Network hostname 563 Network IP address 564 Network Mac address 565 Network resource Ethernet resource string 565 Network settings 562 Network status 562 OPT string 568 QR code 569 RS232 566 see Remote operation from a computer 73 Serial 565 Set IDN and OPT to ...

Page 1024: ...nnel 461 Roll off factor DM 125 Root raised cosine filter see Root Cosine 142 Rotary knob 45 User variation 291 296 RRC filter see Root Cosine filter 142 RS232 Baud rate 566 Parity 566 Serial interface 566 Stop bits 567 S S Parameter Activate corrections 402 Safety instructions 26 SAMBA SMB How to access the instrument 497 Sample level ALC 381 Automatic level control 381 Sample rate Aggregated 461...

Page 1025: ...tup file 529 User correction data file 385 Select file 489 Select instrument External RF and I Q 451 Self test Remote 615 Selftest ARB file test generator 939 Connection selftest BNC 936 Destination 936 Execute baseband 937 Frequency test generator 938 Gain test generator 938 Result 936 Source 936 Source test generator 938 State test generator 938 Selftests About 928 Sensitive information Protecti...

Page 1026: ...opy 591 Shutting down 33 Signal Interferer PEP 266 Signal Noise PEP 266 Signal duration 230 Signal generation status 111 Signal monitoring Graphical display 407 Signal output LF 370 Signal period mode 229 Signal power 264 Signal source Analog modulation 347 Signal to connector mapping How to 524 Signal Noise ratio 263 Simultaneous signal generation start Several instruments 430 Sine test signal 14...

Page 1027: ... STB 967 Step Frequency sweep 333 Linear frequency sweep 333 Logarithmic frequency sweep 333 RF level sweep 334 Step width User variation 291 296 Stop Frequency sweep 332 RF level sweep 334 Stop bits RS232 interface 567 Storage location usb 471 var user 471 var volatile 471 Mass memory 617 Store Save 481 Storing 927 Storing files 618 Stream distributing Settings 443 Stream mapping Settings 443 Str...

Page 1028: ...itude of test signal 157 ARB generator 147 Frequency 155 157 Offset DC 157 Phase offset Q 156 Samples per period 155 157 Value I Q 158 Testing High power amplifiers 238 Text entry 80 Text paramters in remote commands 959 Threshold Pulse modulation 524 Time UTC 930 Timeout Filter power sensors 401 Tooltips Show 82 Touchscreen Compared with mouse 74 Overview 41 Test 932 Usage 74 Touchscreen test Per...

Page 1029: ... 528 529 SCPI command 529 Select dialog ID 529 Toggle between define and execute mode 529 User manual 25 User mapping Catalog 123 Delete 123 User name Setup security 546 User password Security 546 Setup 546 User preset 476 User variation Activating 291 296 Level 291 296 RF 291 296 User definable preset Recall 526 Utility keys Overview 43 V Variable FSK Deviation 124 Selecting 123 Variable referenc...

Page 1030: ... Wireless LAN standards 88 WLAN standards 88 Workflow Multi segment waveform 215 Workgroup name 563 Wrap around Avoiding problems 225 Overcome problem 217 Z Zero Power Sensors 399 Zeroconf IP address 950 Zeroconf APIPA protocol 39 Zoom Control list display 133 Zoom In Out Pulse graph 363 Zoom position Pulse graph 363 Zooming Pulse graph 363 ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for SMBV100B

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands

Rohde & Schwarz SMBV100B, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for SMBV100B

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands